You are on page 1of 214

1.

NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS


1.1 NOMENCLATURE (take STS-750 for example)

Battery Locking Lever

Battery SB-21

Objective Collimator
Lens
Vertical Clamp Screw

Vertical Tangent Screw

Plate Vial

Data Port

Display

Adjustment Screw for Circular Vial


Leveling Screw

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Telescope Grip
Telescope Focusing Knob

Telescope
Focusing Knob

Instrument
Eyepiece
Center Mark

Horizontal
Clamp Screw

Horizontal
Tangent Screw

Circular Vial

Tribrach Lock
Base

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1.2 DISPLAY

Power Switch Key ON

STS-750

Version:06.08.31

【General Measurement】 1/4


PtID: A1
R.HT: 1.500 m
HR: 0°00′00″
V : 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓

Main Menu
● Confirm the battery power shown on the display. Replace it with another charged
battery or charge when battery level is low. Refer to section 2.3 “Battery Power
Remaining Display”.
● The chart above is the display screen,there may be a little difference on local
language.

1.3 KEY BOARD 1


2 3 4

7
8
7
9

3 5
It takes STS-750 for example here, STS-720 has not Numeric key.
1) Current operation section (available section) 2) Icon
3) Fixed key (have relevant fixed function) 4)Numeric key

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5) Navigation key
6) Soft key (Functions vary according to the message displayed.)
7) Soft function key (display relevant operation function, use to start-up relevant function. It can
use to start-up figure and character function in STS-720)
8) Measure hot key (important key)
9) Power key

1.4 FIXED KEY


[User key]:User key can be defined. Can select the function of this key from “common
function” menu.
[function ]:Measurement key in common use. Several functions could be called up, the
instruction as follows:
·function could be started up directly in different application.
·every function in menu could be appointed in user key(see“4.4 main setting”)
[ Menu ]:Menu key. Calling program, parameter setting, data management, communication
parameter, instrument adjustment, system information and data transmission, etc.
In the menu including many choices, there is shortcut figure viewed at the right of every
choice, use the shortcut figure to start up directly, no need to page.
[ PAGE ]:Page key.When there are several pages in one dialog box, it can be used to page.
[ ESC ]:Return to the previous mode or display.
[ ENT ]:Confirm the inputting values, and enter into next step.

1.5MEASUREMENT HOT KEY


Measurement hot key (important key)can be set to three functions “measure & record”,
“measure”, or “close”. The function can be activated in Settings or Main Settings.

1.6 SOFT KEY(FUNCTION KEY)


【General Measurement】 1/4
PtID : A1
R.HT: 1.500m
HR: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
ALL DIST RECORD ↓
SetStn EDM ↓
Set Hz TILT BEEP ∣←

The measurement data is displayed in the several upper lines of the display, orders and the
soft keys are at the bottom line, which can be activated through corresponding function key. The
meaning of each soft key depends on current activated application and function.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Soft Key:
Key Function
[All] To run angle and distance measurement mode, and record
the data.
[Meas] To run angle and distance measurement mode, but not
record the data.
[REC] To record the measurement data
[NEZ] To open the coordinate inputting mode
[List] To view list of all the options
[Search] To run the function of searching input points
[EDM] To display EDM setting
[Esc] To return to the previous mode or display.
[Con] To continue to next mode or display.
[ ] To return to Soft Key of the first page
[ ↓ ] To continue to Soft Key of the next page
[ENT] To set screen information or display and return to the
previous display.

1.7 SYMBOL
Symbol representes a specifically working status basing on different software edition.
Key Content
Several options can be choosed
To choose by Left & right navigation keys
To Esc by Enter key or Up & down navigation key

, , Have several pages, and can use Page to select


Ⅰ,Ⅱ Telescope(alidade) is at FaceⅠor FaceⅡ.
( ) HR setting is“left angle measurement”(or right angle
measurement),that is to circumrotate anticlockwise
(clockwise)

1.8 ICON
Measurement mode status icons:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Battery power remaining icon:
View the remaining power (The icon on the left represents 80% power remaining)

Compensator status icons:


Compensator is ON
Compensator is OFF

Character/Number inputting mode icons:


01 Number Inputting Mode
AB Character/Number Inputting Mode
1.9MENU TREE
[Menu]>F1-F4 is to confirm the selected menu. Press Page to view the next page. Menu tree
may be different in the order of display.

MUNE (P1)

Program -----------Surveying
----Stakeout
----Free Station
----COGO
----Tie Distance
----Area (plan)
----Remote Height
----Reference Line/Arc
----Roads
----Construction

Settings -----------Contrast, Trigger Key, User Key, V- setting,


Tilt Crn, Coll. Crn
----SectorBeep,Beep,Hz<=>, Facel Def., DataOutPut, Auto Off
---- MinReading, Angle Unit, Dist.Unit, Temp. Unit, Press. Unit,
Code Rec.
----GSI 18/16, Mask 1/2

EDM Setting ----------EDM Model


----Prism
----Atmospheric Data
----Grid Factors
----Signal
----Multiply Constant

File Management --------Job


----Known point
----Measurement

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


----Codes
----Initializing Memory
----Memory Statistic

MUNE (P2)
Adjustment ----------------V- index
----Hz-collimation
----Horizontal Axis
----VO/Axis(Cons,list)
----lnst, Constant
----Tilt Parameter
----State

Comm Parameters ------Baud Rate


----Data Bits
----Parity
----End Mark
----Stop Bit

Data Transfer ------------Data Send ---- Job


---- Data
---- Format

System Information ------------Battery


----Date
----Time
----Version
----Type
----Number

1.10 AUTO POWER OFF

If no key operation is done for the setting time (30 minutes), the power turns off
automatically.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2、PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT

2.1 UNPACKING AND STORE OF INSTRUMENT

· Unpacking of instrument
Place the case lightly with the cover upward, and unlock the case, take out the instrument.
· Store of instrument
Cover the telescope cap, place the instrument into the case with the vertical clamp screw and
circular vial upwards (Objective lens towards tribrach), and slightly tighten the vertical clamp
screw and lock the case.

2.2 SETTING UP THE INSTRUMENT

Mount the instrument to the tripod. Level and center the instrument precisely to ensure the
best performance.
Operation Reference:
1 Leveling and Centering the Instrument by plumb bob
1) Setting up the tripod
① First, extend the extension legs to suitable length, make the tripod head parellel to the
ground and tighten the screws.
② Make the centre of the tripod and the occupied point approximately on the same plumb
line.
③ Step on the tripod to make sure if it is well stationed on the ground.
2) Attaching the instrument on the tripod
Place the instrument carefully on the tripod head and slide the instrument by loosing the
tripod screw. If the plumb bob is positioned right over the center of the point, slightly tighten
the tripod.
3) Roughly leveling the instrument by using the circular vial
① Turn the leveling screw A and B to move the bubble in the circular vial, in which case
the bubble is located on a line perpendicular to a line running through the centers of the two
leveling screw being adjusted .

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② Turn the leveling screw C to move the bubble to the center of the circular vial.

4) Precisely leveling by using the plate vial


① Rotate the instrument horizontally by loosening the Horizontal Clamp Screw and place
the plate vial parallel to the line connecting leveling screw A and B , and then bring the
bubble to the center of the plate vial by turning the leveling screws A and B.

② Rotate the instrument 90º(100g) around its vertical axis and turn the remaining leveling
screw or leveling C to center the bubble once more.

③Repeat the steps ①② for each 90º(100g) rotation of the instrument and check whether
the bubble is correctly centered in all directions.
2、Centering by using the optical plummet
1) Set tripod
Lift tripod to suitable height, ensure equal length of three legs, spread and make tripod head
parellel to the ground, and place it right above the measurement station point. Prop up tripod on
the ground and fix one leg.
2) Install instrument and collimate to the point

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Set instrument carefully on tripod, tighten the central connecting screw and adjust optical
plummet to make the reticle distinctly. Hold the other two unfixed legs with both hands and adjust
position of these two legs through observation of optical plummet. As it approximately aims at the
station point, make all three legs fix on the ground. Adjust three leg screws of the instrument to
make optical plummet collimate precisely to the station point.
3) Use circular vial to roughly level the instrument.
Adjust length of three legs of tripod, make the circular vial bubble of the instrument in the
middle.
4)Use plate vial to level the instrument accurately.
①Rotate the instrument horizontally by loosening the Horizontal Clamp Screw and place the plate
vial parallel to the line connecting leveling screw A and B, and then bring the bubble to the center
of the plate vial by turning the leveling screws A and B.
②Rotate the instrument 90℃, make it perpendicular to the connecting line of level screws A and
B. Turn level screw C to make the bubble of the plate vial in the middle.
5) Precisely centring and leveling
Through observation of optical plummet, slightly loosen the central connecting screw and
move the instrument evenly (Don’t rotate the instrument), making the instrument precisely
collimating to the station point. Then tighten the central connecting screw and level the instrument
precisely again.
Repeat this operation till the instrument collimate precisely to the measurement station point.

2.3 BATTERY POWER REMAINING DISPLAY


Battery power remaining display indicates the power condition .
【 Measure 】 1/4 Battery power remaining display
Pt ID : A1
RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
ALL DIST RECORD ↓

Note :
① The battery operating time will vary depending on the environmental conditions such as
ambient temperature, charging time, the number of times of charging and discharging etc. It is
recommended for safety to charge the battery beforehand or to prepare spare full charged batteries.
② The battery power remaining display shows the power level regarding the current
measurement mode. The distance measurement mode consumes more power than angle
measurement mode, so the power enough for the latter is not sure applicable for the previous one.
Pay particular attention to this when switching angle measurement mode to distance measurement
mode, because insufficient battery power might lead to interrupted operation.
● Before outdoor operation, battery power status should be well checked.
③ When the measurement mode is changed, the battery power would not immediately show the
decrease or increase. The battery power indicating system shows the general status but not the
instantaneous change of battery power.

11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


· Battery Recharging Cautions:
☆ Battery should be recharged only with the charger SC-21 going with the instrument.
☆ Remove the on-board battery from instrument and connect it to battery charger. When the
indicator lamp on the battery charger is orange, the recharging process has begun. When
charging is complete (indicator lamp turns green), disconnect the charger from its power
source.
·Battery Removal Cautions:
Before removing the battery from the instrument, make sure that the power is turned off.
Otherwise, the instrument may be damaged.
·Battery Recharging Cautions:
☆ The charger has built-in circuitry for protection from overcharging. However, do not
leave the charger plugged into the power outlet after recharging is completed.
☆ Be sure to recharge the battery at a temperature of 0°~±45°C, recharging may be
abnormal beyond the specified temperature range .
☆ When the indicator lamp does not light after connecting the battery and charger, either
the battery or the charger may be damaged. Please connect professionals for repairing.
·Battery Charging Cautions:
☆ Rechargeable battery can be repeatedly recharged 300 to 500 times. Complete discharge
of the battery may shorten its service life.
☆ In order to get the maximum service life, be sure to recharge it at least once a month.

2.4 REFLECTOR PRISMS


When measuring distance, a reflector prism needs to be placed at the target place. Reflector
systems come with single prism and triple prisms, which can be mounted with tribrach onto a
tripod or mounted onto a prism pole. Reflector systems can be self-configured by users according
to job.
Illustrated are some prism systems that match:

2.5 MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING INSTRUMENT FROM TRIBRACH

·Dismounting
If necessary, the instrument(including reflector prisms with the same tribrach) can be

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


dismounted from tribrach. Loosen the tribrach locking screw in the locking knob with a
screwdriver. Turn the locking knob about 180° counter-clockwise to disengage anchor jaws, and
take off the instrument from tribrach..

·Mounting
Insert three anchor jaws into holes in tribrach and line up the directing stub with the directing
slot. Turn the locking knob about 180°clockwise and tighten the locking screw with a screwdriver.

2.6 EYEPIECE ADJUSTMENT AND COLLIMATING OBJECT

·Method of Collimating Object(for reference)


① Sight the Telescope to bright place and rotate the eyepiece tube to make the reticle clear .
② Collimate the target point with top of the triangle mark in the coarse collimator. (Keep a
certain distance between eye and the coarse collimator).
③ Make the target image clear with the telescope focusing screw.

☆ If there is parallax when your eye moves up , down or left , right , it means the diopter of eyepiece lens or
focus is not well adjusted and accuracy will be influenced, so you should adjust the eyepiece tube carefully
to elimate the parallax.

2.7 INPUTTING MODE


STS-750 series Total Station has character numeric keypad, users therefore can input fig and
character directly. And since STS-720 is not equiped with numeric keypad, it needs to press [ENT]
on keypad (or navigation key ) to open inputting mode. These two kinds of total station
instrument will be introduced separately and particularly as follows.

·STS-750:

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Each key of STS-750 Total Station Instrument is defined with three characters and one fig.
Number area
Number area can only be input figures, press on keypad and figures will be displayed on the
screen.

ALPH / NUMBER AREA.


The Alph/ number area can input characters and figures. Start inputting mode by pressing the
key on character keypad. The needed characters can be selected by pressing several times, such
as:A->B->C->7……
If the sign is [AB] in the lower right conner of screen, you can input character/fig on numeric
keypad;if it is 01, you can only input figures. For any requirement for manually inputting, press
[F4] to switch between character and figure inputting mode.

·STS-720:
STS-720 series Total Station instrument needs to press [ENT] (or navigation key )to start
inputting mode.
If the sign is [AB] in the lower right conner of screen, you can input characters and figs on
the keypad;if it is [01], you can only input figures.

Where only need to input figures (such as coordinate), it starts with the figure inputting
mode.
【 Measure 】 1/4
Pt ID : A1
RHT : 0.000 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m 01

Press soft key corresponding to figure to input the figure needed.

Where both fig/character can be input, it starts with the character/fig inputting mode,
press soft key to activate the corresponding character/fig., and display it on the screen.

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【 Measure 】 1/4
Pt ID :
RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

Press [F4](↓) to display the other soft key pages, press the corresponding soft key to input
character/fig..

·Sign
The characters which can be input in STS-700 series Total Station Instrument are:A~Z . / $
% _ @ & * ?! + - etc.
+/-:In character /fig inputting mode, its meaning is similar to those common characters and
has not figure meaning. In fig inputting mode, it can only be used in front of the input figs.

·Special characters
* In wildcard searching, it is required to use the sign “*”. In character inputting mode of
STS-750 Series instrument, press +/- key once; For STS-720, after starting character/fig inputting
mode, press the first soft key, and then the soft key corresponding to “*” .

·In editing mode, the location of decimal point can not be changed, and it can be jumped over.
All keys can be entered into screen.
Use navigation key to move the cursor.
Use navigation key to delete character where the cursor is placed

2.7.1 INPUT CHARACTER


Take STS-750 as an example: each key is defined with three characters and a figure, as
entering the character/fig. inputting mode, every time you press the keypad, a letter would occure
at the cursor, and a fig occures by pressing four times. As the needed character/fig occurs, the
cursor move automatically to the next item.
E.g.:input 123ABF8
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


① Press the key on numeric 【 Measure】 1/4
keypad to start inputting. As the Pt ID : 1
sign in the lower right corner of RHT : 1.500 m
HZ : 0°00′00″
the screen is [01], it means it is
V : 90°00′00″
in the numeric inputting mode. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m 01
INSERT CLEAR DELETE NUMBER
【Measure】 1/4
Input[1] Pt ID : 123
②Press numeric key 123, after [2] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ : 0°00′00″
inputting figures, press [F4] [3]
V: 90°00′00″
(ALPH) to enter character + : ---.--- m Ⅰ
inputting mode. [F4] : ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
③Press numeric key “7” once, 【Measure 】 1/4
showing letter A, the cursor Input [A] Pt ID : 123ABF8
automatically moves to the next [B] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ : 0°00′00″
position, press “7” twice, [F]
V: 90°00′00″
showing B, then press “8” three [8] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
times, showing F, finally, press : ---.--- m AB

“8” four times, to show 8. So as INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER


to finish inputting 123ABF8.
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID : 123ABF8
④Press [ENT] to end inputting [ENT] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
and move to the next item.
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
ALL DIST RECORD ↓

Take STS720 as an example:input 568AF


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① Press [ENT] to start 【Measure】 1/4
inputting mode, then press the Pt ID :
key corresponding to the RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
character. [F4]
V: 90°00′00″
To display the other soft : ---.--- m Ⅰ
key pages, press [F4](↓). : ---.--- m AB

16

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID : 5
[F2] RHT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
②Press [F2], and then [F1] to Input [5]
V: 90°00′00″
input fig. “5”. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

【Measure 】 1/4
Pt ID : 5
RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
③The soft key returns to last [F2]
V: 90°00′00″
page, i.e. figure inputting Input[6] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
mode. : ---.--- m AB

【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: 56
[F2] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
④ Press [F2] again, and then Input [6]
V: 90°00′00″
[F2] to input fig. “6”. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID : 56
RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
⑤The soft key returnes to last
V: 90°00′00″
page. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: 568
[F2] RHT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
⑥Press [F2], and then [F4] to Input 8
V: 90°00′00″
input fig. “8”. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

⑦The soft key returns to last 【Measure 】 1/4


page, by pressing [F4](↓) to Pt ID: 568
find the page of pressing key of [F4] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
character you need.
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑧Press [F1] to enter character 【Measure 】 1/4
inputting mode. Press [F2] to Pt ID: 568A
input letter“A”. [F1] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
Input A
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

⑨The soft key returns to last 【Measure】 1/4


page, by pressing [F2] to enter Pt ID: 568A
DEFG inputting page. RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
[F3]
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

⑩Press [F3] to input “F”. So 【Measure】 1/4


the pointID 568AF has been Pt ID: 568AF
input. RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
Input F
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB

(11)Press [ENT] to end 【Measure 】 1/4


inputting and move the cursor Pt ID: 568AF
to the next item. [ENT] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
ALL DIST RECORD ↓

2.7.2 EDITTING CHARACTER


Input characters can be edit. (here,only take STS-750 as an example)
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: SAYDING
RHT : 1.500 m
①Press navigation key to
HZ: 0°00′00″
move the cursor to the
V: 90°00′00″
character needed to edit. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: SANDING
② Input new character.(e.g.: Input [N] RHT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
input“N”here)※1)
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: SANDING
③Press [ENT] to confirm the RHT: 1.500 m
HZ : 0°00′00″
input. [ENT]
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
Set Hz TILT BEEP ∣←
※1)About the way to input character,please refer to “2.7.1 inputting character”。

2.7.3 DELETING CHARACTER


Input characters can be deleted.(only take STS-750 as an example)
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID : SANDING
RHT : 1.500 m
①Press navigation key to
HZ: 0°00′00″
move the cursor to the
V: 90°00′00″
character needed to delete. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID : SANDING
②Press [F2](DELETE) or use [F2] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
navigation key to delete Or
V: 90°00′00″
the related character. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER

19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③Press [ENT] to confirm the 【Measure】 1/4
input . Pt ID : SANDING
To restore the original value, [ENT] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
press [ESC] to cancel the Or [ESC]
V: 90°00′00″
amendment. : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
ALL DIST RECORD ↓

2.7.4 INSERTING CHARACTER


If you omit a certain character in inputting, e.g.: “SADING”has missed out an“N”,you can
insert the character.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① Press navigation key 【Measure】 1/4
moving the cursor to “A”. Pt ID: SANDING
RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
【Measure】 1/4
②Press [F1](INSERT), or press Pt ID: SAN DING
[F1] RHT : 1.500 m
to insert an empty
HZ: 0°00′00″
character on the right of “A” (in Or V: 90°00′00″
the fig inputting statu, insert : ---.--- m Ⅰ
“0”) : ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
③ The cursor stays at the 【Measure】 1/4
inserted empty character, input Pt ID: SANDING
the omited character (here, RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
input “N”). ※1) Input [N]
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
【Measure】 1/4
④Press [ENT] to confirm the Pt ID : SANDING
input. [ENT] RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
To restore the original value, Or [ESC]
V : 90°00′00″
press [ESC] to cancel the : ---.--- m Ⅰ
amendment. : ---.--- m
ALL DIST RECORD ↓

※1) To press [INSERT] or at the last character, a space will be inserted(In the fig inputting
mode, input 0), and the cursor will move automatically backward (the number of character not
exceed the max value.)

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.8 POINT SEARCHING
Point searching is a comprehensive function, which use a procedure to search measurement
points or known points in internal memory.
The searching scope can be limited to a certain job or the whole internal memory
The known points matching searching condition always emerge before measurement opoints.
If there are several points qualified to the searching standard, these points will line up according to
their storing time. The instrument always finds out the current newest known point first.
To search directly
Input a precise pointID (e.g.: “A12”), press [FIND],then all points named “A12”can be found.
There are many places to start the point searching function. Here, take searching the known
points in “setting station” as an example.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
①In Program, press Surveying, 【 Set.Stn 】
and after entering measure Input pointID Input Station PtID :

function, press Setting Station. + StnPt: A12


Input pointID (Here, take [F1]
“A12” as an example)and press FIND LIST EHN
ENT. Then press [F1](FIND)
to start the FIND function.
②Display searching result. Use 【Pt Searching 】 1/25
A12 Known
A12 Meas
navigation key to select the A12 Meas
A12 Meas
point, after the point you need +
A12 Meas
is found, press [F4](OK) or [F4] A12 Meas
VIEW ENH JOB OK
[ENT] to return to last manu. Or[ENT]

Introduction of soft keypad at the bottomof the screen :


[VIEW] To display the coordinate of the selected point

【Pt SEARCHING/ ENH VIEW】


③ Use navigation key to Pt ID: A12
Y/E : 100.000 m
select a pointID, press [F1] [F1] X/N : 100.000 m
(VIEW) to display the H : 26.000 m
coordinate information of this DATE: 2006.08.21
TIME: 08:20:56
point. OK
【Pt Searching】 1/25
A12 Known
A12 Meas
④Press [ESC] or [F4](OK) to [ESC] A12 Meas
A12 Meas
return to last menu. Or
A12 Meas
[F4] A12 Meas
VIEW ENH JOB OK

[ENH] Input coordinate point manually

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【ENH input】
JOB : SANDING
Pt ID: ------ ------
③If the pointID you need does [F2] Y/E : ------. ------ m
not exist in the job, press [F2] X/N : ------. ------ m
(ENH) to input coordinate. H : ------. ------ m
Back SAVE

【ENH input 】
④Input pointID and E、N、Z Input Pt JOB : SANDING
Pt ID: 10
coordinate. As one item has been ID 、ENH Y/E : 10.000m
input, press [ENT] moving the + X/N : 100.200 m
cursor to the next item. [ENT] H : 10.220 m
01
INSERT DELETE CLEAR
⑤ As finishing all inputting, [F4]
press [F4] to save the pointID
into job.
[OK] Confirm the selected point
[JOB] Select the pointID in another different job
③If not find the pointID you 【Pt Search】
need in present job,you can
JOB : ANDG
choose it in another job or input [F3] Pt ID: *
coordinate by hand in the Select job/input Pt coord

selected job. Press [F3] (JOB)


key to enter this function. FIND 0 SET ENH

【Pt Search 】
④ Press navigation key
JOB : SANDING
moving cursor to job item, + Pt ID: *
through to select the other
Select job/input Pt coord
jobs in internal memory, and + FIND 0 SET ENH
press [ENT] moving cursor to [ENT]
the next item.
⑤ Input the pointID to be 【Pt Search】
searched, then press [ENT]. To
JOB: SANDING
input the coordinate manually, Input Pt ID : *
press [0SET] or [ENH].※1) pointID Select job/input Pt coord

+
[ENT] FIND 0SET ENH

【Pt Search】 1/1


12 Known
⑥ Press [F1] to search the
pointID qualified to searching [F1]
condition in the selected job.

VIEW EHN JOB OK


※1)[F2](0SET ): Press this key to set E,N,Z coordinate of the input pointID as 0 value.
[F3](ENH): Input coordinate of this point manually .

22

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2.9 WILDCARD SEARCHING
Use wildcard “*” representing those characters you are going to search.
The wildcard searching is usually used in those conditions such as: not know exactly the
pointID you want to search or the points are a passel.
DEMONSTRATION:
* Find out all points
A Find out all points named “A”
A* Find out all the points began with “A” (e.g.:A8,A71,ABDE)
*1 Find out all the points with a name in which the second bit is 1 (e.g.:W1,F15,A1R)
A*1 Find out all the points with a name that the first bit is A, and the third bit is 1 (e.g.:
AD1, AR100, AS16)

OPERATIONAL STEPS:(taking “*” as an example)


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
①In Program, press Surveying, 【Set.Stn】
after entering measure function, Input Pt. ID
Pt. ID :
press Setting Station. Input +[F1]
StnPt : *
wildcard “*: (Here takes “*”
VIEW LIST ENH
as an example) , and press
[ENT]. Then press [F1]
(SEARCH) to start searching
function.
② Display search result. Use 【Pt Search】 1/254
2 Known
A1 Known
navigation key to select 12
Known
pointID you need, press [F4] +
111 Meas
(OK) or [ENT] to return to last [F4] 233 Meas
201 Meas
menu. Or[ENT]
VIEW ENH JOB OK

23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3. ROUTINE MEASUREMENT
3.1 DISTANCE SURVEY CAUTIONS
As the instrument is installed, turn on the power, then the total station is ready for operation.
In displaying, you can invoke functions like fixed key, functional key and hot key.
All displayed here are demonstrations. The local edition may have some differences from the
basic one.
Demonstrations for routine measurement:
【 Measure 】 1/4
Pt ID :
RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓
SetStn EDM ↓
SETHz TILT BEEP |←

F1-F4 Start the corresponding function


NOTE:
In the process of measurement, the STS-700 series Total Station in the infrared distance
measuring mode should avoid aiming at a strong reflecting target such as traffic light to carry out
distance measurement. For the surveyed distance is either wrong or inaccurate .
Once trigger the [MEASURE](HOT KEY) key, the instrument will survey the distance of target
in light-path.
In distance surveying, if passengers, automobiles,animals or waving branches of tree are in the
light-path, partial beam of light will be reflected to the machine and lead to an incorrect result.
Ensure the correct constant annexed to different reflecting prism.

3.2 EDM SETTING


3.2.1 Setting EDM Mode
Choose distance measurement modes, the measurement modes provided by the instrument
are: fine single /fine 2 times /fine 3 times/ fine 4 times/fine 5 times /fine repeat/tracking.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Measure】1/4
Pt ID :
① Press [F4](↓) to display the [F4] RHT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
second page soft key of [F4]
V: 90°00′00″
surveying. Press [F3] to enter [F3] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
EDM Settings. : ---.--- m
SetStn EDM ↓

24

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② As the cursor stays at EDM 【EDM Settings】
MODE, press navigation key
EDM Mode: Tracking
to choose the survey
mode. Prism: 30.0mm

ATMOS GRID SET ↓


③As finishing setting, Press [F3] 【EDM Settings】
(SET) to return to measure
function. [F3] Quit the parameter?
To cancel the settings, by pressing
[ESC], a dialog box will show as
the right picture. CANCEL OK
Press [F1] to return to EDM
Settings function to reset EDM
parameters.
Press [F4] to quit and return to
measure function.

3.2.2 Setting the Prism Constant


Since the constants of prisms manufactured by different companies are different, the
corresponding prism constant must be set. Once the prism constant is set, it would be kept even if
the machine is turned off.
● Setting illustration: prism constant -30mm
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【EDM Settings】

EDM Mode: Tracking


① After entering EDM Settings
Prism : 30.0mm
screen, use navigation key
to move the cursor to Prism item.
ATMOS GRID SET ↓
【EDM Settings】

EDM Mode: Tracking


②Input prism constant and press Input-30
[ENT]. + Prism: -30.0mm

※1)~※2) [ENT]
ATMOS GRID SET ↓
③ After finishing setting, press 【EDM Settings】
[F3](SET) to return to measure
function. [F3] Quit the parameter?
If to cancel the settings, press
[ESC], a dialog box will appear CANCEL OK
as the right picture.
Press [F1] returning to EDM
Settings to renew the EDM

25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


parameters. Press [F4] to return to
the measure function

※1) The way to input prism constant please refer to “2.7 INPUTTING MODE’
※2) The scope of prism constant :-99mm~+99mm, Step Length 0.1mm

3.2.3 Set Atmosphere Data


Refraction modules:
The instrument will automatically correct the effect of atmosphere refraction and the earth
curvature when calculating the horizontal distance and the height differentia.
The correction for atmosphere refraction and the earth curvature are done by the formulas as
follows:
Corrected Horizontal Distance:
D=S * [cosα+ sinα* S * cosα(K-2) / 2Re]
Corrected Height Differentia:
H= S * [sinα + cosα* S * cosα(1-K) / 2Re]

If the correction of atmosphere refraction and the earth curvature is neglected, the
calculation formula of horizontal distance and the height differentia are:
D=S·cosα
H=S·sinα

……………………
In formula: K=0.14 Atmosphere Refraction Modulus
………………
Re=6370 km The Earth Curvature Radius
………………...
α(或β) The Vertical Angle Calculated From Horizontal
Plane (Vertical Angle)
………………………….
S Oblique Distance
NOTE: The atmosphere refraction modulus of this instrument has been set as: K=0.14. It also can
be set shut:(0 VALUE)

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY


【EDM Settings】

EDM Mode: Tracking


①In EDM Settings screen, press [F1]
[F1] (Atmos) to enter atmospheric Prism: 30.0mm

correction function.
ATMOS GRID SET ↓
【Atmosphere Data】

Retr..Corr: 0.14
②The current settings displays on Temp: 20℃
the screen. Pressure: 1013.2 hPa
Atmos PPM: 0 PPM
BACK PPM=0 SET

26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Atmosphere Data】
③Input refraction modulus. E.g.:
RetrCorr: 0.20
input 0.2, and press [ENT], Input 0.20 Temp : 20℃
moving the cursor to Temp item. + Pressure : 1013.2 hPa
Atmos PPM: 0 PPM
※1),※2) [ENT]
BACK PPM=0 SET
④ As the settings are finished, 【EDM Settings】
press [F4] to store and return to
EDM Mode: Tracking
the previous menu, here you have [F4]
to press [F3](SET) to save [F3] Prism: -30.0mm

settings and return to measure


ATMOS GRID SET ↓
function.
※1)The inputting scope of refraction modulus: 0.00(SHUT) ~0.20
※2)The way of input please refer to “2.7 INPUTING MODE”.

Atmospheric Correction:
Light’s travelling speed in the air is not a constant, it varies with the change of the
temperature and pressure of atmosphere, the instrument can automatically modify observing result
once the atmospheric correction value is set.
The atmospheric correction value will still be kept even if the machine is shut off.

The calculating formula for atmospheric correction is as follows: (Calculating unit:


meter)
PPM = 273.8 - 0.2900 × Pressure Value(hPa)
1 + 0.00366 × Temperature value(℃)
If the pressure unit adopted is mmHg : make conversion with 1hPa = 0.75mmHg.
If regardless of atmospheric correction, please set PPM value as 0
The standard atmospheric condition of STS Total Station instrument (e.g. the atmospheric
condition under which the atmospheric correction value of the instrument is zero ) :
Pressure:1013 hPa
Temperature: :20℃
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【EDM Settings 】

EDM Mode: Tracking


①In the screen of EDM setting ,
press [F1] (Atmos) to enter
Prism: 30.0mm
atmospheric correction function.

ATMOS GRID SET ↓

27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Atmosphere Data】

Retr.Corr : 0.14
②The current settings display on Temp : 20℃
the sreen, use navigation key Pressure : 1013.2 hPa
Atmos PPM: 0 PPM
to move the cursor to Temp item.

BACK PPM=0 SET


【Atmosphere Data】

Retr.Corr: 0.14ATUR
③Input temperature value, Input 26 Temp: 26℃
e.g.: Input 26℃, press [ENT] to + Pressure: 1013.2 hPa
Atmos PPM: 0 PPM
move the cursor to Pressure item. [ENT]

BACK PPM=0 SET


④Input pressure 【Atmosphere Data】
e.g.:input 1020 hpa, and press Input 1020
Retr.Corr: 0.14
[ENT], the atmospheric correction + Temp: 26℃
value will be calculated by the [ENT] Pressure: 1020.0 hPa
Atmos PPM: 3 PPM
procedure, the cursor will move to
the refraction modulus. ※1),※ BACK PPM=0 SET
2),※3),※4)
【EDM Settings】
⑤ After finishing setting, press [F4]
EDM Mode: Tracking
[F4] to save and return to the [F3]
previous menu, here press [F3]
Prism: -30.0mm
(SET) again to save the setting
and return to measure function.
ATMOS GRID SET ↓
※1The inputing scope:Temperature:40~+60℃(step length 0.1℃) or -40~140℉(step length 0.1℉)
Air pressure:420 ~ 799.5 ㎜ Hg(step length 0.1 ㎜ Hg) or 560 ~ 1066 hPa(step length 0.1hpa)
16.5 ~ 31.5 inchHg(step length 0.1 inchHg)
※2)Inputting method please refer to “2.7inputting mode”
※3)The atmosphere correction value will be calculated by the instrument according to the inputted
temperature and pressure value.
※4)Press [F3](PPM=0) to set atmos correction as zero.

3.2.4 Grid Factor


In coordinate calculation, use horizontal distance to multiply scale.
Calculation Formula
R
1..HEIGHT FACTOR=
R + ELEV
R : The average radius of the earth
ELEV:The height of the mean sea level
2. SCALE
SCALE: the scale on the measurement station

28

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


GRID FACTOR = height factor×scale

Distance Calculation
1. GRID DISTANCE
HDg = HD × Grid factor
HDg:Grid distance
HD :Ground distance
2.. GROUND DISTANCE
HDg
HD =
Grid

Note: 1.Inputting range of scale:0.990000 ~ 1.010000. The default value: 1.00000


2.Inputting range of average altitude:-9999.8 ~ 9999.8
The average altitude value is rounded off to the nearest tenth and the default value is zero
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【EDM Settings】

EDM Mode: Tracking


①On the screen of EDM setting ,
press [F2](GRID) to enter Grid
Prism: 30.0mm
Factor setting.

ATMOS GRID SET ↓


②The current settings display 【Grid Factor】
on the screen, input Scale and Input Scale Scale : 1.000000
Ht.a.MSL and press[ENT]key.The +
Ht.a.MSL: 0.0 m
[ENT]
procedure will calculate and Input Grid: 1.000000
display grid. If want to set All Ht.a.MSL
+ BACK 0 SET SET
settings to 0 value, press[F3](0 [ENT]
SET ) 。※1)
③ Press [F4](SET) to save the 【EDM Settings】
settings and return to the previous
EDM Mode: TRACKING
menu, then press [F3](SET) again [F4]
to save the settings being done, [F3]
Prism: 30.0mm
and return to measure function.

ATMOS GRID SET ↓


※1)The way of input please refer to “2.7 inputting mode”。.

3.2.5 Viewing Distance Survey Signal


This function displays the intensity of returned-ray signal (signal intensity)being received by
the total station instrument, step length 1%. Once refraction ray from the prism is received, this
instrument will make beeping sound and show the ray intensity expressed by %. he best
collimation precision can be realized by this function when the target is difficult to find or see.

29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【EDM Settings】
①In EDM setting screen, press
EDM Mode: Tracking
[F4] (↓) to display the second [F4]
page menu, press [F1] to check [F1] Prism: 30.0mm

the signal of distance


measurement. ATMOS GRID SET ↓
SIGNAL MulCon ∣←
② The ray intensity which is 【EDM SIGNAL】
received by the machine is
EDM Mode: IR
expressed by the bar graph and a
% displaying on the screen,
showed as the right picture. ※1)
65%
Back
【EDM Settings】
③Press [F1] to return to EDM
EDM Mode: Tracking
setting menu. [F1]
Prism: 30.0mm

ATMOS GRID SET ↓


※1)IR:infrared distance measurement(distance surveyed by the prism)

3.2.6 Setting Multiply Constant


This function clewed the setting of multiply constant. The value of multiply constant. will be
obtained by examination

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY


【EDM Settings】

EDM Mode: Tracking


① On EDM setting function, [F4]
press [F4](↓) to display the second [F2] Prism: 30.0mm

page menu, and press [F2] to set


Mul-Cons . ATMOS GRID SET ↓
SIGNAL MulCon ∣←
【Multiplication Cons】
Input
②Input Mul-Cons and press ENT Mul-Cons Mul-Cons : 0.0 ppm
+
SAVE
[ENT]

30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【EDM Settings】

EDM Mode: Tracking


③Press [F4] to save the setting and [F4]
return to EDM setting menu. Prism: 30.0mm

ATMOS GRID SET ↓

3.3 START SURVEY


The routine survey is divided into four pages of menu, including all routine surveying
functions, such as angle survey, distance survey and coordinate survey, which are shown as the
below pictures:

【 Measure 】 1/4 【 Measure 】 2/4


Pt ID : A1 Pt ID : A1
RHT : 1.500 m RHT : 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″ HZ: 0°00′00″
V : 90°00′00″ V : 90°00′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m : ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓ SET Hz TILT BEEP ∣←
【 Measure 】 3/4 【 Measure 】 4/4
Pt ID : A1 Pt ID : A1
Code : SANDING RHT : 1.500 m
RHT : 1.500 m HZ : 0°00′00″
HZ : 0°00′00″ Y/E : ---.--- m
V : 90°00′00″ Ⅰ X/N : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m H / Z: ---.--- m
AII CODE EDM ↓ Set.Stn EDM ↓

3.3.1 Setting Horizontal Circle


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: A1
①Collimate to the target point used Collimate to RHT: 1.500 m
for orientation setting. the target HZ : 50°20′00″
V : 82°00′00″
point
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
SET Hz TILT BEEP ∣←

31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: A1
②Press [F4]( ↓) twice and turn to [F4] RHT: 1.500 m
HZ : 50°20′00″
the third page of soft key. Press [F1] [F4]
V : 82°00′00″
(SET Hz) to set horizontal angle. [F1] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓
SetStn EDM ↓
SET Hz TILT BEEP ∣←
③ Screen shows the current 【Hz Settings】
horizontal angle value
A: HZ: 50°20′00″
If to choose the readings of the
current horizontal circle as the
orientation angle, press [F4](SET) 0 SET SET
directly. A:press [SET]
【Hz Settings】
B:
If to choose the other angle value [F4]
HZ: 50°20′00″
as orientation angle ,just input the
needed angle and press [ENT].
e.g.: input 120°20′30″. ※1)~※3) 0 SET SET

B:Input angle
C:
【Hz Settings】
If want to set horizontal angle to Input HZ
zero, press [F1](0SET). Screen +
HZ : 120°20′00″
shows as the right picture and [ENT]
01
presents whether to set horizontal INSERT DELETE CLEAR
angle to zero? If yes, press
[F4](OK) and return to measure
function. To renew settings, press Press[SET ZERO]

[F1] (CANCEL) to return to 【Hz Settings】


horizontal angle setting function.
[F1] Setting Hz 0 ?
[F4]
CANCEL OK

【Measure】 1/4
④Return to measure function, the Pt ID : A1
horizontal angle set just now is RHT : 1.500 m
displayed, here using set zero as an HZ : 0°00′00″
V : 90°00′00″
example.
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
※4)~※5) : ---.--- m
SET Hz TILT BEEP ∣←

※1)If there is something wrong in inputting, press navigation key and move the cursor to the place

32

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


needed to modify, or press [F3](CLEAR)key and input the correct one
※2) If an error numerical value is inputted (such as:70′)and screen do not answer the inputing, a
reasonable numerical key is needed to press
※3)If the angle unit is degree, minute, and second, as part of ‘degree’s finished, you need to press· or
navigation key to move the cursor to the next inputting area.
※4) The setting of horizontal left angle/right angle ,may be finished in [Main Settings].Please refer to
‘4.4 Main Settings.
※5) For vertical angle setting,it can also be finished in [Main Settings] .Please refer to ‘4.4 Main
Settings.

3.3.2 Setting The Instrument Height Aan Prism Height


After setting the relative coordinate of the occupied point according to origin, the instrument
automatically converts and displays the prism point Coordinate based on the origin and occupied
point.
OPERATIONAL STEP OPERATI DISPPLAY
ON
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: A1
① Press [F4]( ↓ ), turn to the [F4] RHT: 1.500 m
HZ : 0°00′00″
second page of soft key, press [F1]
V : 90°00′00″
[F1](SetStn) to set measurement : ---.--- m Ⅰ
station and instrument height. : ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓
SetStn EDM ↓
②Input the pointID of measurement Input
pointID of 【Set.Stn 】
station, instrument height and measurement Pt ID : OCC1
station point INS.Ht: 1.000 m
coordinate. After finishing one item,
+ Desc: --- --- --- ---
press [ENT] moving the cursor to [ENT] Y0/E0 : 0.000 m
the next inputting area. Since the Input INS.Ht X0/N0 : 0.000 m
+ H0 : 0.000 m
Desc. item describes measurement [ENT]
Input ENH SET
station,it may not be inputted
+
[ENT]
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: A1
③ As all inputting items are RHT: 1.500 m
finished, press [F4](SET) to keep [F4] HZ: 00°00′00″
V: 90°00′00″
the data of measurement station
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
and return to measure function. : ---.--- m
SetStn EDM ↓

3.3.3 Measurement
As all settings are finished,you can start survey now, the survey result has four pages
including all general survey datum, press [PAGE]key to check.

33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Measure】 1/4
Input Pt ID
①Input pointID and prism height,as + Pt ID: A1
finishing one item, press ENT to [ENT] RHT: 1.500 m
Input RHT HZ : 0°00′00″
move the cursor to the next inputting + V : 90°00′00″
area, to input the coding if in need. [ENT]
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓
【Measure】 1/4
② Collimate to the prism center, [F1] Pt ID : A1
press [F1](All) or [F2](DIST) + or RHT: 1.500 m
HZ: 51°20′10″
[F3](RECORD) to start survey, and [F2]
V: 90°00′00″
record the data being surveyed. The + : ---.--- m Ⅰ
data surveyed and recorded [F3] : ---.--- m
including angle, distance, AII DIST RECORD ↓
coordinate, press [TURN PAGE] to
see
【 Measure】 1/4
③Once a point of survey is finished, Pt ID: A2
the pointID will be automatically RHT: 1.500 m
HZ : 51°20′10″
added 1 through the procedure,
V : 90°00′00″
collimate to the prism center to : ---.--- m Ⅰ
repeat the step and start surveying : ---.--- m
the next point。※1). AII DIST RECORD ↓

The other soft keys at the bottom of the screen:


COMPENSATION: To set Open and Shut of tilt compensation ,with options of single axis and
shut .the detailed introduction please refer to’4.1 LEVELING,’
BEEP
[F1]OPEN: Open quadrant sound. In correct scope ((0º,90º,180º,270ºor0,100,200,300gon)
the buzzer beeps
[F2]SHUT; Shut quadrant sound.
Quadrant sound demonstration: The buzzer will makes a brief interval beep as the angle is at 95.0
to 99.5 gon (or 105.0 to 100.5 gon).The buzzer makes a constant beep as the angle is at: 99.5 to
99.995 gon (or 100.5 to 100.005 gon)。showed as the picture below:

34

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


IN GRAPH : 1) Aphonia area
2)Buzzer makes a brief interval beep.
3)Buzzer makes a constant beep.

3.3.4 Coding
The code includes the information concerned with the recording point.In the course of
after-processing ,with coding function,it is convenient to process in specified group.There are
some information concerned with coding in ‘FILE MANAGEMENT’.
The operational step of simple coding :
1、Move the cursor to the“Code”column
2、Input coding name
3、Press [All]to start distance measure and record the coding and measurement data at
same time.Press [Code]to search inputted coding and modify the attributes

OPERATIONAL STEPS::
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Measure】 3/4
Pt ID: A1
①Press [TURN PAGE] to display [TUEN Code: ﹉﹉ CODING
RHT: 1.500 m
measure page of 3/4 and move the PAGE
HZ:: 63°40′50″
cursor to coding column. + V : 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
[F4] : ---.--- m
AII DIST RECORD ↓

35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Measure】 3/4
Pt ID : A1
②Input the code, and press [F4](↓) Code: SANDING
RHT: 1.500 m
to display the second page soft key, Input the code
HZ: 63°40′50″
here, the single coding being input + V: 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
will not be enlisted in coding [F4] : ---.--- m
storeroom. AII DIST RECORD ↓
AII CODE EDM ↓
A:Press[AII]
【Measure】 3/4
A : Press [F1](All) to start
Pt ID : A1
measurement, save all datum of the
Code : SANDING
coding and measurement into job※ RHT: 1.500 m
1) HZ: 63°40′50″
V: 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
AII CODE EDM ↓
B:Press [F2](Code) to search the
B:Press [Code]
codings already inputted.
【Code Search】1/2 ▼
Select / Input new code!
Search: SANDING
Code : --- ---
Desc : --- ---
Info1 : --- ---
Info2 : --- ---
RECORD ADD OK

※1)The save sequence of the data of coding and measurement is set in ‘Settings’ or ‘Main settings’
The settings of coding record are : save before , save after. Here explain separately as follows:
save before:to save coding data before practical survey data
save after :to save the coding data closely after practical survey data
Please inquire in “measurements’ document

After starting [Coding] function, the coding screen shows as follows:


【Code Search】1/2 ▼
Select / Input new code!
Search:
Code : --- ---
Desc : --- ---
Info1 : --- ---
Info2 : --- ---
RECORD ADD OK
GSI- Each attributes of GSI code are narrated below:
CODE : Code name。
DESC : Appended note
Info1 : Editable information including more content
……
Info8 : The other information column

After coding search function is started, if the code name is already in the coding storeroom ,
it can be edited.Here the edited data can not be kept in the coding storeroom any more. You may
press [RECORD] to keep it in survey data document as a single coding value, or press [All]

36

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(or[DIST]+[RECORD])to keep it in survey data document together with those survey data as a
single coding value,besides, the save sequence of coding data and practical survey data is also can
be set ( to set in the item ‘Code record’ in ‘Main Settings’ and ‘Settings’).
To set code save before:represents that as the survey is finished, the coding data will be saved
before practical survey. data.
To set code save after: :represents that this coding data is saved after practical survey data.

If the code input does not exist, once edit is finished, you may press [ADD]key to add a
new code to code storeroom, or press [RECORD] or[AII](or[DIST]+[RECORD])to keep it as a
single coding data, in survey data document

The operations under two situations are introduced seperatly :


1)The inputted coding name exists in the store:expand/edit the codings
As the coding in need is called up from coding list,the attribute can be edited at will
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Code Search】 1/2▼
① The procedure automatically Select / Input new code!
Search:
search the code arranged in code Code: --- ---
storeroom, if the inputted code Desc: --- ---
exists,it will be displayed in coding Info1 : --- ---
Info2 : 1/2 --- ---
column. 。※1) RECORD ADD OK

【Code Search】1/2 ▼
Edit the Select / Input new code!
Search: SAN
②Expand/edit the coding attribute, coding Code : SAN
as one item is input,press ENT to attributes Desc : --- ---
move the cursor to the next edit + Info1 : --- ---
Info2 : --- ---
item. [ENT] RECORD ADD OK

37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② The code well edited can be [F4] A:press[RECORD]
kept in survey document. 【Measure】 3/4
Pt ID: A1
Code:
RHT: 1.500 m
A: Press [F1](RECORD) returning HZ: 0°00′00″
to measure function, set the input V: 90°00′00″ Ⅰ

code as the code of the present : ---.--- m


AII CODE EDM ↓
measuring point and add a new
coding value to Measurements
document. ※ 2) B:Press[ADD]
【Code Search】

B:Press[F2] (ADD), a dialog box


appearing as the right picture,the
Invalid Code !
same code can not be added
repeatly, press [F4] to return. ※3)
OK
C: Press[F4](OK) only to set the
inputted code as the code of the
present measuring pointID and
return to the measure function.
※4)
※1) A wildcard“*”can also be input to search all codes in code store,press“ to display each
code.Press [TURN PAGE]key to see the other pages of coding attributes.
※2)The added coding value can be found in Measurements document of internal memory.
※3)The same code name can not be added repeately in code store
※4)Press [F4] to conclude coding function, save the coding block in system.It can only be recorded
together with practical measure point.
The settings of coding record in “Settings”or “Main settings”are“save before and save
after”,here explain separately as follows:
save before:to save coding data before practical survey data
save after :to save the coding data closely after practical survey data
Please inquire in “measurements’ document.

2)This code not existing in code store; input each item of coding attribute manually
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Code Search】 1/2▼
①Single coding block can be input Input the Select / Input new code!
Search:
by keyboard in turn.Once an item is coding Code: --- ---
finished, press ENT to move the attributes Desc : --- ---
cursor to the next attribute. 。※1) + Info1 : --- ---
Info2 : --- ---
[ENT]
RECORD ADD OK

38

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


②A:Press [F1](RECORD) to return A:The code value being added in survey point
document
to measure function, and set the
【VIEW】 88
input coding as the code of the Mode: CODING SYS.MESS
present measuring point, add a new Pt ID: --- --- ---
Code: SANDING
coding value to Measurements
Desc: --- --- ---
document ※2) Date: 05.08.2006
Time: 11:29:41
SEARCH
B:New code added in the code storeroom:
B : Press [F2](ADD) besides
【Code search / delete】1/2 ▼
returning to measure function and Search: *
setting the input code as the code of Code : SANDING
Desc: VIP
present measuring point,a new code
Info1 : --- ---
will also be added to the coding Info2 : --- ---
storeroom . ※3) Info3 : --- ---
NEW DELETE
C:
【Measure】 3/4
C:Press [F4] (OK) only to set the
input code as the code of present Pt ID: A1
CODE: SANDING
measuring pointID and return to
RHT: 1.500 m
measure function. Only by starting HZ: 63°40′50″
surveying can the input coding be HZ: 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
saved into Measurements documents : ---.--- m
along with measuring operations. AII CODE EDM ↓

※4)
※1)Press[TURN PAGE]key to edit /view the other pages of the coding attributes
※2)The added coding data can be seen in the Measurements document in File management
※3)The added coding can be found in the coding storeroom.
※4)Press[OK]key to conclude the coding function , the coding blocks are kept in the system
temporarily, and they can only be recorded together with the practical measurement point.
The settings of coding record in “Settings”or ‘Main settings’ are: “save before and save
after”,here explain separately as follows:
save before:to save coding data before practical survey data
save after :to save the coding data closely after practical survey data
Please inquire in “measurements’ document.

3.3.5 )Quick Code(Only For STS-750)


To use quick code function, you can call up directly a pre-defined coding by numeric keys of
the instrument. By inputing a digit of two bit, you may choose a code and trigger survey. Since the
survey is triggered, the survey data and coding will be saved all together.
100 quick codings in all can be defined,you may create coding with code block manager
provided by SANDING company, and transfer to the instrument .In the code block manager, each
code can be arranged 1bit or 2bit digit exclusively
If the code was not dispatched with a digit from“coding block manager”,the code will be
choosed according to their inputing sequence(e.g.: 01->:the first code in the code list.10->the tenth
code in the code list).For the coding format please refer to appendix A.

39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Measure】 3/4

Collimate to Pt ID: A1
①Collimate to the prism center of the target Code : --- --- CODING
point + RHT: 1.500 m
the target point ,and input pointID Input Pt HZ: 63°40′50″
and prism height, press[TURN ID 、 RHT V: 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
+
PAGE]key to display measure page [TURN : ---.--- m
of 3/4,press[F4](↓)to display the PAGE] + AII DIST RECORD ↓
[F4]
third page soft key AII CODE EDM ↓
AII Q-CODE EDM ∣←
② Press[F2](Q-CODE) , to start
quick coding function. Screen
prompts ‘Q-code active !’then return [F2] Q-code active !
to measure page of 3/4.
Press[F2] again, and shut
Q-CODE function.
【Measure】 3/4
Pt ID: A1
③ The serial number of the input Input the Code : --- --- CODING
serial number RHT: 1.500 m
quick coding in internal memory are of Q-CODE HZ: 63°40′50″
digits of 2 bit。 V: 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
※1) : ---.--- m
AII Q-CODE EDM ∣←
④ Procedure starts the coding 【Measure】 3/4
searching, to check the quick coding Pt ID: A1
in internal memory. Code: CODING
RHT: 1.500 m
If find the quick coding
HZ: 63°40′50″
corresponding to the code, start V:: 94°33′51″ Ⅰ
survey function ,and the survey : 1.963 m
result and quick coding will be AII Q-CODE EDM ∣←

displayed as this survey is finished


If the quick coding corresponding to
the code doesn’t exist in internal
memory or the code number in
internal memory is smaller than the
code, it will displays “Code not
exist!”※2)
※1)Even if only 1digit is dispatched to the coding in “code block manager”,2 bit numeric code should
be inputted. E.g.: 4->INPUT04
※2)If the code is input on the instrument, or the code has not been dispatched a quick code in “code
block manager”, the code will be numbered in its save sequence, therefore, as the input quick code is
bigger than the total number of codes, the program will prompt“Code not exist!”

40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4. FUNCTIONS
Several functions can be called up via [FNC] key.
Functions can also be started directly from the different application.
Each function from the Function menu can be assigned to the [USER] key. (See 4.4 “Main
Settings”)

Several functions:
Light ON/OFF
Switches display light on/off.

Units
Display the current distant and angle unit. Pressing the navigation key or can change the
units. After one setting is finished, move to the newxt setting by pressing or . When all
settings are done, press [SET] to save and return.

Free-Coding
Select code from the codelist or enter a new code.

4.1 LEVELING
As the tilt sensor is activated, automatic correction of vertical angle for mislevelment is
displayed.
To ensure a precise angle measurement, tilt sensor must be activated (See 4.4 (Main Settings),
the display can be used to fine level the instument.
If [TILT OVER] is displayed, it indicates that the instrument is out of the automatic
correction range, and that it needs to be leveled manually. Please refer to “2.2 Instrument Setup”
for detailed leveling instruction.
STS-700 Total Station compensates the verticle angle reading due to inclination of the
standing axies in the X directions .
OPERATION PROCEDURE
OPERATION STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Function】1/4 ▼
①Press soft key [FNC] in the
F1 Level (1)
right of the screen to enter into [FNC] F2 Target Offset (2)
F3 Delete Last Record (3)
the Function menu.
F4 Main Settings (4)

【Tilt Adjust】
② Press [F1] to activate the
auto tilt correction function. [F1] X: -0°50′21″

Off Back

41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ Tilt correction value is 【Tilt Adjust】
shown on the screen.
If the value is within +3’, it X: -0°0′21″
is within the designed range of
automatic compensator. Press
[F4] to return to the function Back
menu.
If the value is beyond +3’, it
needs to be leveled manually.
Then it will return to the
function menu automatically.
④After finishing leveling, the
screen will return to previous
status.
When the instrument is placed on an unstable stage or in a windy weather condistion, the
display of vertical angle is unstable. You can switch off the auto tilt correction function of vertical
angle.
If the mode of auto correction has been activated, (single axis, see “4.4 Main Settings”), in
the condition that the instrument has not been leveled, the program will demand that the
instrument must be leveled at first, so as to enter other functions.

4.2 TARGET OFFSET


When it is not possible to set up the reflector or aim the target point directly, this function
will perform helpfully. Enter the offset values (length, cross and/or height offset). The values for
the angle and distances can be calculated directly for the target point.

If the height offset value is plus, it indicates that the offset point is higher than the
measurement point.

42

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATION STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Function】1/4 ▼

F1 Level (1)
①Press [FNC] to enter into the FNC F2 Target Offset (2)
F3 Delete Last Record (3)
Function menu.
F4 Main Settings (4)

② Press [F2] to enter into [F2] 【Target Offset】


Input Offset!
Target Offset function. +
T_Offset : 0.000m
Input the offset values (length, Input L_Offset : 0.000m
H_Offset : 0.000m
cross and/ or height offset offset values,
values). period of MODE: 0set After REC
Define the period for which the applicability 0SET OK
offset is to apply. +
Press [F1] ([OSET]) to set [ENT]
eccentricity to zero. +
Press [F4] to confirm. [F4]

【Target Offset】
③Press navigation key to Input Offset!
T_Offset : 0.000m
select the period of L_Offset : 0.000m
applicability. The modes + H_Offset : 0.000m

available are: 0Set After REC [F4] MODE: Oset After REC
and Permanent. 0SET OK
After finishing all the settings,
press [F4] to save.
④The program calculates the 【Measure】 1/4
corrected values and returns to PtID: A2
the application from which the [F2] R.HT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
offset function was started.
V: 90°10′50″
Focus on the center of reflector : ---.--- m Ⅰ
and press [F2] to start : ---.--- m
measuring. ※1) All DIST RECORD ↓
【Measure】
⑤ The corrected angle and PtID: A2
distances are diplayed when a R.HT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
valid distance measurement has
V : 90°10′50″
been triggered or exists. : 5.568 m Ⅰ
: 3.689 m
All DIST RECORD ↓

43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑥When “Oset After REC” is Displays the Rec. data beforehand.

selected: 【Measure】
PtID: A2
R.HT: 1.500 m
If [All] is started, the HZ: 0°00′00″
program will display the data V: 90°10′50″
(the target point) which is : 5.568 m Ⅰ
calculated by plusing the : 3.689 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
measured result and the offset
Restart measurement, displaying the data of
correction.
measurement point:
If [DIST] is started, you must 【Measure】
restart measurement after PtID: A2
pressing [RECORD] to display R.HT: 1.500 m
the actual value of the HZ: 0°00′00″
V: 90°10′50″
measurement point.
: 2.568 m Ⅰ
: 1.689 m
When the “Permanent” is All DIST RECORD ↓
selected, the program will
always diplay the data plused
the offset correction.
【Target Offset】
⑦ If there is no more point of Input Offset!
T_Offset : 0.000m
target offset to measure, repeat L_Offset : 0.000m
the procedure ① to restart the H_Offset : 0.000m

Target Offset function. MODE: Set After REC


0SET OK

※1)If the coodinate of target point is needed to calculate, please set the coodinate of station,
heights of instrument and reflector, backsight point, etc.

The period of applicability can be set as follows:


MODE EXPLANATION
0set After REC The offset values are set to 0 after the point is saved.
Permanent The offset values are applied to all further measurements.

The offset values are always reset to 0 when the application is quit.

4.3 DELET LAST RECORD


This function deletes the last recorded data block, which can be either a measurement block
or a code block.
Delete the last record is irreversible!
Only records recorded in “Surveying” or “Measuring” can be deleted.

44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATION PROCUDURE
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Function】1/4 ▼
F1 Level (1)
F2 Target Offset (2)
①Press [FNC] to enter into the F3 Delete Last Record (3)
Function menu. FNC F4 Main Settings (4)

②Press [F3] to delete the last [F3] Sure delete final record?
record, as shown on the right.

CANCEL OK

【Measure】
③ Press [F4] to confirm to P + ID: A2
delete the data. R.HT: 1.500 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
If not, press [F1]([CANCEL])
V: 90°10′50″
The program will return to
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
Mesure function. : ---.--- m
All DIST RECORD ↓

4.4 MAIN SETTING


This menu enables extensive user-specific settings in order to adapt the instrument to their
own requirements.
You can change a number of important settings.
You can also start this function by selecting “Setting” in “Menu”.
OPERATION STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLY
【Function】1/4 ▼
①Press [FNC] to enter in to F1 Level (1)
F2 Target Offset (2)
the Function menu and select FNC F3 Delete Last Record (3)
“Main Settings”, or press F4 Main Settings (4)

[MENU] and select


“Settings”.
【Setting】1/4 ▼
② Press [F4] to enter into Contrast: 4
TriggerKey: OFF
Settings function. [F4] User Key: Light
V-Setting: Zenith
Tilt Grn: OFF
Coll. Crn: OFF
SET

45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③Press navigation key 【Setting】1/4 ▼
to select other modes of this + CONTRAST: 4
Triggerkey OFF
setting, and press [ENT] or [ENT] User Key Light
or V SETTING Zenith
to move on to the next
Tilt Grn : OFF
setting. ※1) Coll. Crn : OFF
SET

【Setting】2/4 ▼
Sector Beep: OFF
Beep : OFF
HZ<=> Right Angle
Face Def. VK-Left
Data Output : Intern
Auto-Off : ON
SET

【Setting】3/4 ▼
Min Reading: 0°00′00″
④ Press [PAGE] to display
PAGE Angle Unit : dd.mm.ss
other pages. Follow the Dist. Unit : Meter
procedure ③ on other items Temp. Unit: °C
Press Unit : hPa
to be set. Code Rec. Save Before
SET

【Setting】4/4 ▲
GSI 8/16 : GSI 8
Mask 1/2 : Mask 1

SET

⑤After all the settings are


done, press [F4] ([SET]) to
save, and quit the Settings
menu.

※1)Press to move the cursor upward and downward; press to select other modes in the

item.
※2) , , indicates that there are some pages to select by pressing [PAGE].

Detailed instruction to the Settings is shown as follow.

FUNCTION OPTION EXPLANATION


Contrast 1~8 Setting the display constrast in 10% steps. Customers can
adjust the diplay to best status through this function.

46

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Configuration of the trigger key on side cover.
TriggerKey All/ Dist/OFF OFF Trigger key deactivated.
All Trigger key with same function as the [All] key.
Dist Trigger key with same function as the [Dist] key.
Light/Level/HT
Transfer/Offset/ One function from the Function menu. Customers can
Code/Dist.Unit/ designate the [USER] key according the using frequency
User Key Angle Unit/ Hidden and habit.
Pt/Delete Rec./
Tracking/Check Tie/
Settings
The “0”- oreintation of the vertical circle can be either
Zenith/ Horizon/ selected for the zenith, the horizontal plane or in %.
V - (%) z Zenith: Zenith=0°; Horizon=90°
V-Setting z Horizon: Zenith=90°; Horizon=0°
z V-(%): 45°=100%; Horizon=0°
The % value increases rapidly.”--.--%” appears on
the display above 300%.
·OFF: Tilt compensation switched off.
·1-axis V-angle relate to the plumb line.
If the instrument is used on an unstable base(e.g. shaking
platform, ship, etc.) the compensator should be switched
Tilt Crn. 1- axis / OFF off. This avoids the compensator drifting out of its
measuring range and interupting the measuring process by
indicating an error.
The compensator setting remains active even after the
instrument is switched off.
· ON :HZ Collimation is switched on.
·OFF: HZ Collimation is switched off.
If option “Coll Crn.” is active,each measured HZ angle is
Coll Crn. ON/OFF corrected.
For normal operation, the HZ Collimation remains
switched on.
See “10. Check and Adjust” for detailed instruction.
·ON:Sector Beep sounds at right angles(0°,90°,180°,270°,
Sector Beep ON/OFF or 0, 100, 200, 300 gon)
·OFF:Sector Beep switched off.
The beep is an acoustic signal after each key stroke.
Beep ON/OFF ON: Beep switched on.
OFF: Beep switched off.

47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


HZ Incrementation Direction:
Right Ang: Set right HZ for “clockwise direction
HZ <=> Right Ang / Let Ang measurement”.
Left Ang: Set left HZ for “Counter-clock direction
measurement”.
FaceⅠ Def. VK-Left / Defines the telescope face I in relation to the position of
VK- Right the Vdrive.
·Intern: All data is recorded in the internal memroy.
DataOutput Intern / RS232 ·RS232: Data is recorded via the serial interface. With
this aim, a data storage device must be connected.
·ON :The instrument is switched off after 20 minutes
without any action (= no key pressed; V and HZ angle
Auto - OFF ON/OFF deviation <3’/+600cc).
·OFF:The instrument is switched on permanently. Battery
discharges quicker.

The displayed angle format can be selected in 3 steps.


·For 360°′″:
0°00′01″/0°00′05″/0°00′10″
Min Reading ·For 360°:
0.0001°/0.005°/0.0001°
·For gon:
0.0001gon/0.0005gon/0.0010gon
·For mil:
0.01mil/0.05mil/0.10mil
· °′″(degree sexagesimal), possible angle values: 0°~
359°59′59″
dd. mm. ss ·DD(degree decimal), possible angle values:0º~359.9999º
Angle Unit / deg/ gon/ mil ·gon, possible angle values:0gon~399.9999gon
·mil, possible angle values:0mil~6399.99mil
The setting of the angle units can be changed at any time.
The actual displayed values are converted according to the
selected unit.
·M Meter
Dist. Unit Meter / US-ft / ·US-ft Us-feet
INT-ft / ft – in 1/8 ·INT-ft International feet
·ft-in 1/8 US-feet-inch-1/8 inch
Temp. Unit ℃/℉ ·℃ Degree Celsius
·℉ Degree Fahrenheit
·hPa Hecto Pascal
Press Unit hPa/mbar/mmHg/in ·mbar Milliba
Hg ·mmHg Millimeter mercury column
·inHg Inch mercury column

48

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Code Rec. Save bfore / Sets if the codblock is saved before or after the
Save after measurement (see “3.3.4 Coding”)
Select GSI output format,
GSI 8/16 GSI 8/ GSI 16 GSI 8: 81..00+12345678
GSI 16: 81..00+1234567890123456
Select GSI output mask.
Mask1/2 Mask1/ Mask2 ·Mask1:PtlD,Hz,V,SD,ppm+mm,hr,hi
·Mask2:PtlD,Hz,V,SD,E,N,H,hr
4.5 HEIGHT TRANSFER
This function determines the height of the instrument from messurements to a maximum of 5
target points, with known heights, in two faces.
With measurements to several targets, the improvement is indicated in the “delta” value.

OPERATION STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Function】1/4 ▼
F1 Level (1)
F2 Target Offset (2)
F3 Delete Last Record (3)
F4 Main Settings (4)
FNC
①Press [FNC] to enter into the +
Function menu. Press [PAGE] PAGE
to turn to Page 2.
【Function】 2/4

F1 Height Transfer (5)


F2 Hidden Point (6)
F3 Free- Coding (7)
F4 Check Tie (8)

【Height Transfer】 1
Select Target Meas!
Pt ID: --- ---
R. HT: 1.500 m
② Press [F1] to enter into [F1] H/Z : ---.--- m
Height Transfer function. : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All EDM SEARCH ↓


LIST DIST RECORD ↓
EHN INS.HT VIEW |←
[F4] 【Height Transfer】
Stn. Pt.
③Press[F4](↓)twice to display +
Ins. HT: 2.000 m
the third page of keys. Press [F4] Y0/E0 : 100.000 m
[F2] to enter into the settings of + X0/N0 : 100.000 m
H0 : 10.000 m
instrument height. [F2]
BACK OK
【Height Transfer】
Height Transfer 1
④ Input the current instrument Input
Select Target Meas!
height, and press [F4] to return instrument
Pt. ID: --- ---
to the screen of Height Transfer. height R.HT: 1.500 m
+ H/Z: ---.--- m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
[F4]
EHN INS.HT VIEW |←

50

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤Select the known point and 【Height Transfer】 1
input the reflector height. Select Target Meas!
Pt ID:
The amount of known points [F1]
R. HT: 1.500 m
is shown on the upper-left Input known H/Z : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
corner of the screen. point, prism : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m Ⅰ
height
All EDM SEARCH ↓
LIST DIST RECORD ↓

There are 3 ways accessible to EHN INS.HT VIEW |←

select known points. A:Press [LIST]:


【Pt. Search 】 1/254
A : Press [LIST], and press 1 Known
2 Known
navigation key to call up the 3 Known
4 Known
needed point from the job. 5 Known
6 Known
Press [ENT] to return to the
VIEW EHN JOB ↓
screen of Height Transfer
B:Input point ID to the known point, press
measurement. [SEARCH]
【Height Transfer】 1
B:Input the known point ID Select Target Meas!
and press [SEARCH] to search Pt ID: 1
R. HT: 1.500 m
whether there is such a point ID
H/Z : ---.--- m
in the job. Be there some points : ---.--- m Ⅰ
All EDM SEARCH ↓
with the same ID, press

to select the point needed.


【Height Transfer】 1
Press [ENT] to return to the
Select Target Meas!
screen of Height Transfer Pt ID: 1
measurement. R. HT: 1.500 m
H/Z : ---.--- m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
All DIST SEARCH ↓
C:You may also input a point
C:Input the ID which is not exist, and press
ID which does not exist, and [ENH]
press [ENH]. Then input the 【Height Transfer】
height of the point, save the PId: SA
data and return to the screen of H : ---.--- m
Height Transfer measurement.
BACK SAVE

51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑥When the screen displays the 【Height Transfer】 1
height of known point, press [F1] Select Target Meas!
Pt ID: 1
[F1]([All]) or [F2]([DIST]) + Or
R. HT: 1.500 m
[F3]([RECORD]) to start [F2] H/Z : 0.0000 m
measuring. The height of + : ---.--- m Ⅰ
station can be calculated. [F3]
All DIST SEARCH ↓

【Height Transfer】 1/2

HT. Tran. Result


Stn. Pt. :
Corr : 1.500 m
No. Pts : 10.0000 m

⑦ Press PAGE to turn to Page 2 PAGE Add Pt FACE BACK OK

to display the mearement result.

【Height Transfer】

⑧ Press [F2] ([FACE]) to


Turn to face!
measure the same target in
second face.
If you don’t need to face [F2]
measure the same point, press
[F1] ([Add Pt]) to add a 【Height Transfer】 1
measurement of the known Select Target Meas!
point. Pt ID: 1
R. HT: 1.500 m
H/Z : 10.0000 m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST SEARCH ↓


⑨After the Face measurement, 【Height Transfer】 1
return to the result menu, and Select Target Meas!
Pt ID: 1
press [F1]([Add Pt]), follow the
R. HT: 1.500 m
procudure ⑤~⑧ to continue [F1] H/Z : 10.0000 m
the measurement of the next : ---.--- m Ⅰ
known point.
All DIST SEARCH ↓

52

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑩ This function provides the 【HT-Tran. Result】 1/2 ▼
measurement of a maximum of
HT. Tran. Result OCC1
5 target points in two faces. Stn. Pt. :
H0 : 8.250 m
After all the measurement is [F4]
Corr. :
completed, press [F4] to No. Pts : 10.0000 m
confirm the result in the menu AddPt FACE BACK OK
of Height Transfer.
⑾ 【H0 Exist】
[F1]([BACK]): Back to Height
Stn. Pt. :
Transfer Result menu. Old H0 :
New H0 :
[F2]([OLD]): Remains the
△H0 : 8.250 m
previous station height.
[F3]([AVE]) : the average BACK OLD AVE NEW

value between the old and new


value of station height to set the
station height.
[F4]([NEW]):takes the value
calculated in the program as the
station height.

4.6 HIDDEN POINT MEASUREMENT


The program allows measurements to a point that is not directly visible, using a special
hidden-point rod.

The Picture shown above implies :


1. E, N, H of Hidden Point
2. Rod Length
3. Distance R1-R2
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPEATION DISPLAY

53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Function】 2/4
①Press [FNC] to enter into the
F1 Height Transform (5)
Function menu. Press [PAGE] [FNC] F2 Hidden Point (6)
F3 Free-Coding (7)
to turn to Page 2. +
F4 Check Tie (8)
[PAGE]

【Hidden Point】
Meas first prism!
PtID: ---.---
②Press [F2] to enter into the [F2]
HZ: 0°00′00″
Hidden Point function. V: 87°40′00″
: ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD RDD/ED


③ Press [F4] (ROD/ED) to set 【Rod Length Settings】
the total length of the rod, the
Rod Length: ---.---
distance between R1 and R2, Dist R1-R2: ---.---
and the measurement toleration [F4] Meas. Tol : ---.---
※. After entering one setting,
press [ENT] to move to the next OK

item. Press [F4] to return to


Hidden Point menu after
finishing all the settings.
④ Enter the point ID of the Input PtID1 【Hidden Point】
first reflector, focus on the + Meas first prism!
Pt. ID: 1
reflector and press [F1]([All]) or [F1]
HZ: 0°00′00″
[F2] ([DIST]) + Or[F2] V : 87°40′00″
[F3]([RECORD]) to start + : ---.--- m Ⅰ
measurement. [F3]
All DIST SEARCH ROD/ED
Input PtID2
【Hidden Point】
⑤ Enter the point ID of the +
Meas second prism!
second reflector, focus on the [F1]
Pt. ID: 1
reflector and press [F1]([All]) or Or[F2] HZ: 0°00′00″
[F2] ([DIST]) + + V : 87°40′00″
[F3]([RECORD]) to start [F3] : ---.--- m Ⅰ

measurement. All DIST SEARCH ROD/ED


⑥Diplays the result. 【Hidden Point】
If the result is unsatisfied, Pt. ID: 1
Desc. : --- ---
press [F4] to repeat procedure [F1] Y/E : 102.205 m
④ to redo the measurement. X/N : 98.021 m
Press [F1]([FINISH]) to save H : 96.247 m
the result, and quit this function. FINISH REMEAS

54

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑦ If the result exceed the
【Hidden Point】
measurement tolerance value, it
Over Limit!
will display the Over Limit. Limit: 0.100 m
Press [F1]: Accepts the limit, Diff. : 0.247 m

and displays the coordinate of


hidden point.
ACCEPT REMEAS
[F4]:Return to procedure ②
to redo the measurement.
※1) Rod Length: Total length of hidden-point rod.
Dist R1-R2: Spacing between the centers of reflector R1 and R2.
Meas. Tol: Limit of the difference between the given and measured spacing of the reflectors.
If the tolerance value is exceeded, the program will issue a warning.

4.7 CHECK TIE


Calculation and display of the slope and horizontal distance, height difference, azimuth,
grade, and coordinate differences between the last two measured points. Valid distance
measurements are required for the calculation.

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPEARTION DISPLAY

【Measure】 1/4
① In Measure menu, measure Pt ID: 1
R. HT: 1.500 m
2 points that are used to check
H/Z : 10.0000 m
tie. ※1) : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST SEARCH ↓

55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Function】1/4 ▼
F1 Level (1)
F2 Target Offset (2)
F3 Delete Last Record (3)
F4 Main Settings (4)

② After finishing measuring [FNC]


these 2 points, press soft key +
[FNC] to enter into the [PAGE]
Function menu. Then press
[PAGE] to turn to Page 2.

【Check Tie】1/2 ▼
③ Press [F4] to enter into AZ: 186°28′36″
Grade: 9.0%
Check Tie menu. The screen [F4]
△ : 4.298 m
displays the AZ of 2 points, △ : 4.316 m
and the relations of the HD, SD △ : 0.396 m
and VD. OK

【Check Tie】2/2 ▼
AZ: 186°28′36″
Grade: 9.0%
④Press [PAGE] to turn to Page PAGE △Y/E: -0.466 m
2. △X/N: - 4.316 m
△H: 0.396 m
OK
【Measure】 1/4
Pt ID: 1
R. HT: 1.500 m
⑤ Press [F4] ([OK]) to return
H/Z : 10.0000 m
to Measure menu. [F4] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
: 4.316 m

All DIST SEARCH ↓


※1) Meaning: The values cannot be calculated as there is less than 2 valid measurements.

4.8 TRACKING
Switches on or off the tracking measurement mode. The new setting is displayed for approximately one
second and then set. The function can only be acticated from within the sam EDM type and prism type.

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

56

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【 FUNCTION 】 3/4

① Press soft key [FNC] to FNC F1 EDM Tracking (9)


F2 Light ON/OFF (0)
enter into Function menu. +
Press [PAGE] twice to turn to PAGE
Page 3.

② Press [F1] to activate


tracking function. Screen
displays as the right picture. Open Tracking Mode!
To deacticate tracking
function, just enter into
Function menu and press [F1]
that sets the EDM Tracking
again.
Everytime when pressing the soft key that sets EDM Tracking function, the measurement
mode will be changed between Fine [s] and Tracking.
The last active measurement mode remains set when the instrument is switched off.

57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


五. PROGRAMS
APPLICATION PRE-SETTINGS
There are programs that precede the application programs and are used to set up and organize
data collection. They are displayed after selecting an application. Users can select the start
programs individually.

【Setting Meas】 [*]

F1 Setting Job (1)


F2 Setting Station (2)
F3 Set Orientation (3)
F4 Start (4)

[*]: Settings made.


[ ]:Settings not made.
Find further information about individual start-up programs on the subsequent pages!

5.1 SETTING JOB


All data is saved in JOBS, like directories. Jobs contain measurement data of different types
(e.g. measurements, codes, fixed points, stations, etc.) and are individually manageable and can be
readout, edited, or deleted seperately.

5.1.1 Setting A New Job


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

【Setting Meas】
①Press [F1] in Setting Meas
[ ]Setting Job (1)
menu to enter into Setting Job [F1] [ ]Setting Station (2)
[ ]Set Orientation (3)
menu.
Start (4)

②Press [F1]([ADD]) to set a 【Setting Job】 1/1


new job.
Job: DEFAULT
Press [OK] to set this job, and [F1] Name: -- --
Date: 2006.08.02
return to start-up program.
Time: 14:10:20

ADD OK

58

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Setting Job】 [*]
Job : SANDING
③ Input the job name and the Input the job
Name: --------
operator name. After finshing information Date: 2006.08.02
one setting, press [ENT] to + Time: 14:10:20
Note 1: ﹉﹉﹉﹉
move to the next item. ※1) [ENT]
Note 2: ﹉﹉﹉﹉ AB

INSERT DELETE CLEAR ALPH


【Setting Job】 [*]
Job : SANDING
④ After all settings, press
Name: ZZZ
[F4]([OK]) to save the job and [F4] Date: 2006.08.02
set the established job as the Time: 14:10:20
Note 1: ﹉﹉﹉﹉
current job.
Note 2: ﹉﹉﹉﹉
BACK OK
⑤ The screen displays “Job 【Setting Meas】
save!” and “Job set already!”,
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
and returns to the Setting Meas [ ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
menu. Settings that are made
F4 Start (4)
will displays “*” in the front.

※1) The establishment date and time will be added to to the system automatically.

5.1.2 Calling up a Job from Iternal Memory


When there is existed job in internal memory, you can call up and set it as the current job.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Setting Meas】
① Press [F1] in the Setting
[ ]F1 Setting Job (1)
Meas menu to enter into Setting [F1] [ ]F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
Job function.
F4 Start (4)

【Setting Job】 1/1


②Press navigation key( )
Job: SANDING
to view all the jobs in internal + Name: --- --- ---
memry. When selecting the [F4] Date: 2006.08.02
Time: 14:10:20
needed job, press [F4] ([OK])
to set it as the current job.
ADD OK

59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ The screen displays “Job 【Setting Meas】
set already!” and returns to
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
Setting Meas menu. Settings [ ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
that are made will display “*”
F4 Start (4)
in the front.

All subsequent recorded data is stored in the current job.


If no job was defined and an application was started or if in “Measure” [All] or [REC] was
triggered, then the system automatically creates a new job and names it “DEFAULT”.

5.2 SETTING STATION


Each coordinate computation relates to the currently set station.
At least plan coordinates(E,N) are required for the station. If necessary, the station height can
be entered. The coordinates can be entered either manually or read from the internal memory.

5.2.1 Calling up a Job from Iternal Memory—[SEARCH]


PROCEDURE: 1. Select a PtID strored in internal memory.
2. Input instrument height.
[OK] Sets the station.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Setting Meas】
①Press [F2] in Setting Meas
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
menu to enter into Setting [F2] [ ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
Station menu.
F4 Start (4)

【Setting Station】
② Enter the PtID of known Input PtID
Input Station Pt. ID!
point and press [ENT].※1) +
Stn Pt:
[ENT]

SEARCH LIST ENH

60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③Press[F1]([SEARCH]): A:
A:If the PtID exists in the job, 【Point Search】 1/4
12 Known
the screen will diplay as the 12 Meas.
right picture. If there are several 12 Meas.
12 Meas.
points, the program will list
them seperately.
SEARCH ENH JOB OK

B:
B:If the PtID input does not
【Pt Search】
exist, the program will imply
“ PtID No Exist!”, and then Job : SANDING
Pt. ID: 56
display Coordinate Input menu.
You can call up PtID from other Select job / inpurt Pt. coord
jobs to set as the station. Move
FIND 0SET ENH
the cursor to the job item, press
to select other job (or all
【Coordinate Input】
jobs), and press [ENT] to move Job : SANDING
the cursor to PtID item and Pt. ID: 56
input PtID. Press [F1] Y/E : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
X /N : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
([SEARCH]). If the point is H : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
found, press [OK] in Pt Search
menu to set it as the station and BACK SAVE

set the instrument height. If the


point does not exist, press
[F3]([ENH]) to input the
coordinate.
[0SET] : Quickly set the
coodinate of the point to zero
and set it as the station.
[ENH]: Displays the Coordinate
Input menu. Input the coodinate
and save it in the job.
④ The program implies to [F4] 【Setting Station】
input the instrument height. Input
Input INS.HT!
Press [ENT] to confirm, and instrument
press [F4] to save it and set it as height INS.HT: 1.000 m

the station. +
[PtID]: Return to previous [ENT] PtID OK
dialog. and set station point. [F4]

61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Setting Meas】

[*]F2 Setting Job (1)


⑤ Returns to Setting Meas [*]F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
menu. Settings that are made
F4 Start (4)
will display “*” in the front.

※1)For more information about point search, please refer to “2.8 Point Search”. You can also
search via wildcard “*”. See “2.2 Wildcard Search”.

5.2.2 Call up Known Point in Interal Memory—[LIST]


In terms of setting station PtID, you can also call it up directly from internal memory without
inserting.
【Setting Station】

Input Station Pt. ID!


②In Setting Station menu, press [F2] Stn Pt: --- --- ---
[F2] ([LIST])
SEARCH LIST ENH

【Point Search】 1/25


12 Known
③ Data of all known points and
12 Meas.
measured points will be 12 Meas.
12 Meas.
displayed.
VIEW ENH JOB OK

VIEW :
【Pt Search Coord View】

Pt. ID: 56
Y/E : 155.301m
X /N : 152.361m
H : 129.569m

OK
④Press navigation key to ENH:
select the needed point. 【Coord Input】

VIEW: to Views the coodinate Job SANDING


information of the point. Pt. ID: ﹉﹉.﹉﹉m
Y/E : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
ENH: .to input coordinate data
X /N : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
in the job, H : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
JOB: to select data from other BACK OK
job. JOB:
【Point Search】 1/4
Job : SANDING
Pt. ID: 56

Select job / input Pt Coord

FIND 0SET ENH

62

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[F4] 【Setting Station】
Input
Input INS.HT!
⑤ After selecting the needed instrument
INS.Ht: 1.000 m
point, press [F4] ([OK]) to enter height
into INS.Ht inserting menu. +
[ENT] PtID OK
[F4]

5.2.3 Input Coordinated Manually


PROCEDURE: 1.Press [ENH] to display the Input Coordinate menu.
2. Input PtID and coordinate.
3. Press [SAVE] to save the station coordinate. Then input instrument height.
If no station was set or no application started and if in “Measure” [All] or [REC] was
acticated, then the last station is set as the current station.
OPERATONAL STEPS PROCEDURE DISPLAY
【Setting Station】
① Press [F3] ([ENH]) in
Input Station Pt. ID
Setting Station menu. [F3] Stn Pt: ﹉﹉.﹉﹉

SEARCH LIST ENH


【Coordinate Input】
Job : SANDING
② Input PtID and Input PtID and
Pt. ID: OCC1
coordinate. After finishing coordinate Y/E : 100.000 m
one setting, press [ENT] to + X /N : 100.000 m
H : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
move on to the next item. [ENT]
01
INSERT DELETE CLEAR
【Setting Station】
Job : SANDING
Pt. ID: OCC1
③Press [F4] to save station [F4] Y/E : 100.000 m
coordinate. X /N : 100.000 m
H : 0.000m

BACK SAVE
【Setting Station】
④ When the screen displays Input
Input INS.HT !
“Data Save Already!”, input instrument
the instrument height and height INS.HT: 1.000 m

press [ENT]. +
[ENT]
PtID OK

63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Setting Meas】
⑤ The screen returns to
[*]F1 Setting Job (1)
Setting Meas menu. Settings [*]F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
that are made will display “*”
F4 Start (4)
in the front.

3.5 SET ORIENTATION


With the orientaion, HZ-direction can be input manually or points with known coodinates can
be set.
5.3.1 .1 Manually Input
PROCEDURE: 1. Press [F1] to input a random HZ-orientation.
2. Input HZ-direction, reflector height and PtID.
3. Press [All] to start measurement and set orientation.
4. Press [RECORD] to records HZ-direction and set orientaion.
OPERATIONAL STEPS PROCEDURE DISPLAY
【Setting Meas】
① Press [F3] in Setting
[*]F1 Setting Job (1)
Meas menu to set the [F3] [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
orientation.
F4 Start (4)

【Orientation 】

② Press [F1] to enter into [F1] F1 Set manually


F2 Known Point
Set Manually function.

③ After Collimating on the 【Set manually 】


BsPt: 2
backsight point, input a Input horizontal
R.HT: 1.500 m
radom AZ value, reflector azimuth value AZ: 9°11′25″
Sight BsPt Meas & Rec !
height and PtID. After +
inputting one item, press [ENT] All SET EDM OSET
[ENT].
④Press [F1] ([All]) to start 【Set Manually 】
measurement and set
BsPt: 2
orientation. R.HT: 1.500m
AZ: 9°11′25″
[SET] : Set orientation [F1]
without acticating the Sight BsPt Meas & Rec !
measurement function.
All SET EDM OSET
[0SET]:Set AZ to zero.

64

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Setting Meas】
⑤ The screen returns to
[*]F1 Setting Job (1)
Setting Meas menu. Settings [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Set Orientation (3)
that are made will diplay “*”
F4 Start (4)
in the front,

5.3.2 With Coordinates


A target with known coodinates can also be used to determine the orientation. The number of
known points can be one or more. This series of instrument provides a method of backsitght point
orientaion with a maximum of 5 known points.

In the picture, 1: Backsight Point 1 2: Back Sight Point 2 3. Backsight Point 3

Procedure :1.Press [F2] to activate orentation with coodinates function.


2.Input the orientation PtID and determine the point found.
3.Input and confirm the reflector height. A maximum of 5 target points with
known coordinates can be used.

Orientation coordinates can be either obtained from the internal memory or entered
manually.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【 Orientation 】
① Press [F2] to set select the
F1 Set manually
method to set orientation. [F2] F2 Known Point

65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② Input the backsight PtID Input 【Known Pt】
and press [ENT]. backsight
Input BsPt!
If reflector height is to be input, PtID BsPt : BS1
+ R. HT: 1.860 m
press navigation key to
move to the R.HT item. ※1) [ENT]
LIST ENH
③ The program automatically A:
searches if there is an exist 【Known Pt 】 1/2 ▼
Bs Pt: BS1
PtID.※2)
R. HT: 1.860 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
A:If there is an unique PtID in V : 90°00′00″
the job, the screen will enter : ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
into backsight measurement : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD EDM
menu.
B:
【Pt Search 】 1/3 ▼
B:If there are more than 1 BS1 Known
points with the same ID, user is 12 Meas.
23 Meas.
requested to select one data
among them.
VIEW ENH JOB OK

C:
C:If there is no such a PtID in
【Pt Search 】 1/3 ▼
the job, user is requested to
input the data of the point. Job : SANDING
PtID: BS1

Select Job / input Pt Coord.

FIND 0SET ENH

④ Collimate on Backsight 【Known Pt 】 1/2 1/I ▼


Point 1, press [F1] (All) or [F2] [F1] Bs Pt: BS1
([DIST]) to start measurement or R. HT: 1.860 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
of orientation with coordinate. [F2]
V : 90°00′00″
[EDM]: change the EDM + : ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
setting. [F3] : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD EDM
⑤ After each measurement,
you will be asked whether you
want more measurement. Press
[OK] to return to measurement [F1] Want More Measurement?
menu and start another
measurement. Press[CANCEL]
to enter into Orientation Result CANCEL OK

menu. ※3)

66

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Orientation Result 】

No.Pts: 1
⑤ Displays the orientation Station: 1
result. Hz Cor: 0°00′00″
St. Dev.: 0°00′00″

RESID OK
※1) Orientation coordinate can selected directly by press [LIST] from the job, and also be input
by pressing [ENH]. For further information, please refer to “5.2 Setting Station”
※2) For further information about various status, please refer to “5.2 Setting Station.”
※3) To start face measurement on the point, press [F4] ([OK]). About a detailed instruction about
face measure, refer to the next chaptor “

In procedure ④ to proceed more measurement, the instrument provides backsight orientation


with more points, i.e. setting the backsight orientation through known points, in order to improve
the accuracy of backsight azimuth. This series of total station system provides a backsight
orientation with a maximum of 5 points.

In orientation measurement, backsight azimuth can ba measured based on FaceⅠor Face Ⅱ,


or both two.

OPERATION (Based on FaceⅠand Face Ⅱ):


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Known Pt】
① Input the first backsight Input PtID
Input BsPt!
PtId and reflector height, and + BsPt : BS1
press [ENT] to enter into [ENT] R. HT: 1.860 m

backsight measurement
LIST ENH
function.

【Known Pt 】 1/2 1/ ▼
② With Face Ⅰ, collimate on Bs Pt: BS1
backsight point BS1, press [F1] R. HT: 1.860 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
([All]) or [F2] ([DIST]) + [F3] [F1]
V : 90°00′00″
([RECORD]) to start or : ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
orientation with coordinate [F2] : ﹉ .﹉ m
measurement. + All DIST RECORD EDM
[F3]
Press [PAGE] to display Page 2
of backsight measurement.

67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ After measurement, the Want More Measurement?
screen displays “Want More [F4]
Measurement?”. Press [F4] to
confirm it.
CANCEL OK

【Known Pt 】
Input Bs Pt!
④ In backsight orientation Bs Pt: BS1
dialog, input the PtID R.HT: 1.254m
V : 90°00′00″
previously measured with Face
LIST ENH
Ⅰ. Please follow procedure ③
of single point orientation.
⑤Reverse the telescope, 【Known Pt 】 1/2 1/Ⅰ ▼
collimate on the backsight Bs Pt: BS1
point BS1, press [F1] ([All]) [F1] R. HT: 1.860 m
HZ: 0°00′00″
OR [F2] ([DIST]) + or[F2]
V : 90°00′00″
[F3]([RECORD]) to start + : ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
orientation with coordinate [F3] : ﹉ .﹉ m
measurement. ※2)~ ※3) All DIST RECORD EDM
The upper-right corner displays
“1/Ⅰ”,indicating that Face Ⅰ
has measured the first
backsight points.
⑥ After measurement, when
displaying “Want More Want More Measurement?
Measurement?” ,
[CANCEL]: Finish
measurement, and display CANCEL OK
result.
[OK]: Proceed to measure other
backsight points. Repeat
procedure ②~⑤ to measure
the orientaion of more
backsight points. The
instrument provides orientation
with a maximum of 5 backsight
points.
⑦ After all points which are 【Orientation Result 】
used for backsight orientation No.Pts: 5
Station: 1
are measured, in dialog of [F4] Hz Cor: 172°22′57″
procedure ⑥, press [F4]([OK]) St. Dev.: 0°00′20″
to display result.
RESID OK

68

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Orientation Residuals】
⑧Press [F1]([RESID]) to enter
BsPt: BS1
into Orientation Residuals △Hz : 0°00′02″
dialog. Press navigation key [F1] △ : -0.005 m
to view the orientaion △ : 0.003 m
residuals of other points.
BACK
⑨If the residuals are OK, press 【Setting Meas】
[F1] to return to Orientation
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
Result dialog. Then press [F1] [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Set Orientation (3)
[F4]([OK]) to set the calculated [F4]
F4 Start (4)
HZ orientation, the screen
displays “Orientation Set
Already!”, and returns to
Setting Meas menu.
※ 1) ▼: Implies that there are several pages selectable. Press [PAGE] to select.
※ 2) Orientation measurement is on Page 2.
△AZ: After the first measurement, the finding of other target points (or the same point when
changing the telescope position) is easier by setting the indicated angle difference near to 0°00′00
by during the instrument.
△ :Difference between horizontal distance to target point calculated from coordinates and the
measured distance.
※ 3) If orientation measurement is based only on one face, there is no need to rotate the
telescope. Collimate on next point directly.
※ 4) Status indication 1/I: shows that first point was measured in telescope position I.
1/II: shows that first point was measured in telescope position II.
1/I II: First point measured in telescope position I and II.

5.3.3 Displaying Residuals

In the picture, 1 is actual measurement point. 2 is design point.

69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Orientation Residuals】

BsPt: BS1
△Hz : 0°00′02″
△ : -0.005 m
△ : 0.003 m

BACK
△ : Height correction
△ : Correction of the horizontal distance
△Hz : Correction of HZ angle.
SIGNIFICANT INFORMATION
If the orientation is only measured in telescope Face II the HZ orientation is based on
telescope Face II. If measured only in telescope Face I or mixed the HZ orientation is based on
Face I.
The reflector height may not be changed during measurements in the first and second
telescope face.
If a target point is measured several times in the same telescope face, the last valid
measurement is used for the computation.
If no orientation was set and an application was started resp. if in “Measure” [All] or [REC]
was triggered, then the current HZ direction and V-angle are set as orientation.

5.4 Applications
Introduction
Applications are predefined programs, that cover a wide spectrum of surveying duties
and facilities daily work in field.
Applications listed as follow are available.
·Surveying
·Stake Out
·Free Station
·COGO
·Tie Distance
·Area (Plan)
·Remote Height
·Reference Line/Arc
·Roads
·Construction
PROCEDURE:
1. Press fixed key [MENU].
2. Press [F1]-[F4] to select “Program” option.
3. Calling up applications and activating start programs. Press [PAGE] to turn to next
page.

5.5 Surveying
The measurement of an unlimited number of points is supported in Surveying program. It is

70

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


comparable to “Measure”, excluding stationing, orientation and coding.

OPERATION : Set job, station and orientation first!!


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【 Setting Meas】
① After setting job, station
[*]F1 Setting Job (1)
and orientation, press [F4] in [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Set Orientation (3)
Setting Meas menu to start [F4]
F4 Start (4)
measurement.

【Measure】 1/3
PtID: 1
② Input PtID and press [ENT] Input PtID R. HT: 1.860 m
Code: ------
to move to next item. ※1) + HZ: 0°00′00″
[ENT] V : 90°00′00″ Ⅰ
: ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
【Measure】 1/3
③ Input reflector height, press Input prism PtID: 1
[ENT] to move to next item. height R. HT: 1.860 m
Code: ------
Enter the code if necessary. + HZ: 0°00′00″
[ENT] V : 90°00′00″ Ⅰ
: ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
④ Press [F1] ([All]) or [F2] 【Measure】 1/3
([DIST]) + [F3] ([RECORD]) [F1] PtID: 1
to start measurement and save or[F2] R. HT: 1.860 m
Code: SANDING
the data. Data surveyed and + HZ: 0°00′00″
saved includes angle, distance, [F3] V : 90°00′00″ Ⅰ
coordinate, press [PAGE] to : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
view. ※2)

71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤ After measuring one point, 【Measure】 1/3
PtID will automatically +1. PtID: 2
Press [F1] ([All]) or [F2] R. HT: 1.860 m
Code: SANDING
([DIST]) +[F3] ([RECORD]) to HZ: 85°51′31″
proceed the measurement of V : 129°20′19″ Ⅰ
next point. Meanwhile, the : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
screen displays the previous
measured data, turn [PAGE] to
view.
※1) Please refer to “2.7 Input Mode” to know more about the input method.
※2)Once Surveying function is activated, all measurement data (including angle, HD, SD, VD
and ENH) will be displayed. Press [PAGE] to view.
5.5.1 Individual Point:
[Indiv P]:In data collection, you can record one single point, exchanging the option between
individual point and continious point by pressing this key.

OPERATIONAL STEPS PROCEDURE DISPLAY


【Measure】 1/3
PtID: 11
R. HT: 1.860 m
Code : SANDING
HZ: 0°00′00″
V : 90°00′00″ I
①Press [F4](↓) three times to [F4] : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
displays the last page.
All CODE EDM ↓

All Q-CODE EDM ↓

All IndivP EDM ↓

【Measure】 1/3
PtID: ---------
②Press[F2] ([IndivP]) to start [F2] R. HT: 1.860 m
Code : SANDING
Individual Point function. The HZ: 0°00′00″
item of PtID is blank. . V : 90°00′00″ I
: ﹉ .﹉ m
All IndivP EDM ↓
【Measure】 1/3
③ Input the individual PtID, Input PtID, PtID: DF1
prism height, code (if R.HT, Code R. HT: 1.860 m
Code : SANDING
necessary). After one setting, + HZ: 50°30′11″
press [ENT] to move to next [ENT] V : 96°21′26″ I
item. : ﹉ .﹉ m
All IndivP EDM |←

72

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Measure】 1/3
④ Press [F1] ([All]) or [F2] [F1] PtID: DF1
([DIST]) + [F3] ([RECORD]) or[F2] R. HT: 1.860 m
Code : SANDING
to start messurement and save + HZ: 50°30′11″
the data measured. [F3] V : 96°21′56″ I
: ﹉ .﹉ m
AU IndivP EDM ↓
⑤ As the measurement is 【Measure】 1/3
finished, the program will PtID: 11
automatically deactivate R. HT: 1.860 m
Code : SANDING
Individual Point function, and HZ: 50°30′11″
displays the previous V : 96°21′56″ I
continious PtID. : ﹉ .﹉ m
AU IndivP EDM ↓

5.5.2 Coding
Three Coding Methods are available :
1. Simple Coding :
Input a code into the relevant box. The code is stored along with the coresponding
measurement.
2. Expanded Coding:
Press [CODE] softkey. The code that was input is searched for within the code list and it is
possible to and attributes to the code.
3. Quick Coding:
Press [Q-Code] and enter the shortcut to the code. The code is selected and the measurement
starts.
For more information, please refer to “3.3.4 Coding”.

5.6 STAKE OUT


This program calculates the required elements to staked out points coordinates or manually
entered angles, horizontal distances and heights. Stake out differences can be displayed
continuously.
Stake Out Procedure:
1. Setting job
2. Setting station
3. Setting orientation
4. Calling up coordinates from internal memory. These coordinates can be measured, and also
can be input the coordinates of known points.
5. Staking out. Three methods of stake-out are available: Polar Stake Out, Orthogonal Stake Out,
Coordinate Offset Stake Out.

5.6.1 Setting Stake-Out Point


5.6.1.1 Calling up Coordinates from job.

73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Setting Meas】
① After setting job, station
[*]F2 Setting Job (1)
and orientation azimuth, press [F4] [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Set Orientation (3)
[F4[ in Setting Meas menu to
F4 Start (4)
start stake-out. ※1)

【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼


② In Find item, input the FIND : *
PtID: 5
stake-out PtID and press [ENT] Input
Type: Known
to start Pt Search function. stake-out △Hz : -85°51′31″
( You can also input wildcard PtID △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
“*” to start wildcard search.) △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
③A: A:
The program searches PtID in 【Point Search】 1/25
A12 Known
the job, and displays the reusult A03 Known
dialog. All PtIDs will be listed 12 Meas.
125 Meas.
seperately. Press [F4] to return 212 Meas.
to Stake Out menu. ( Input VIEW ENH JOB OK
wildcard “*” to display all data
in the job.)

B:
B
【Pt Search】
If the PtID does not exist, the Job : SANDING
program will advise user to PtID : A25

input the coordinate of the Select Job / input Pt coord.


point and save it. Then return to
FIND 0SET ENH
Stake Out menu.
【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
FIND : A*2
PtID: A25
④ Press navigation key
Type: Known
to select the PtID to be staked △Hz : -85°51′31″
out. Start staking out. △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
△ : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
※1) Methods to set job, station and orientation have been introduced previously. Please refer to
“5.1Setting Job”, “5.2 Setting Station”, “5.3 Set Orientation”.

5.6.1.2 Input Coordinate Manually


Press [ENH], [MANUAL] to input stake-out point manually.
Approach 1: Press [ENH] to input the coordinate of stake-out point to the job.

74

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
FIND : *
PtID: 5
① Press[F4]([ ↓ ]) to turn to [F4]
Type: Known
Page 2. △Hz : -85°51′31″
△ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
△ : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
VIEW EDM ENH ↓

[F3] 【Coordinate Input】


② Press [F3] ([ENH]) to input Input PtID & Job : SANDING
PtID: ﹉﹉
PtID and ENH of stake-out ENH Y/E : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
point. After one setting, press + X/N : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
[ENT] to move to next item. [ENT] H : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
BACK SAVE

【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼


③ After finishing inputting, FIND : 5
PtID: 5
press [F4] to save the data, and
Type: Known
enter into stake-out program. [F4] △Hz : -85°51′31″
Start to staking out the input △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
points. ※1) △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
VIEW EDM ENH ↓
※1) Method to stake out is introduced from 5.6.2.

Approach 2:Press [MANUAL] to input a stake-out point without PtID and saved data.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
FIND : *
PtID: 5
Type: Known
△Hz : -85°51′31″
①Press [F4]([↓]) twice to turn [F4] △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
to Page 3. △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓

VIEW EDM ENH ↓

B&D MANUAL |←

② Press [F2] ([MANUAL]). 【Stake Out Input Data】


Input ENH in the dialog. After [F2]
Y/E : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
one inputting, press [ENT] to Input ENH X/N : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
move to nex item. Press [F2] + H : ﹉﹉.﹉﹉ m
([0SET]) if you want to set [ENT] BACK 0SET OK
ENH to 0.

75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③After inputting ENH, press 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
[F4] ([OK]) to enter into Stake FIND :
PtID: DEFAULT
Out menu. The program
Type: Known
automatically set the PtID to △Hz : -85°51′31″
“DEFAULT”, and starts to [F4] △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
stake out the input points. △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
※1),※2) B&D MANUAL |←
※1) [MANUAL]: Data that was input will not be saved in the job.
※2 Method to stake-out is introduced from 5.6.2.
The soft keys below the screen:
[DIST]: Starts measurement and calculation of the stake-out elements.
[RECORD] Saves the displayed values.

5.6.2 Polar Stake Out

In the picture, 1: Actual 2: Point to be staked out

Normal indication of polar stake out offsets.


△Hz Angle offset: positive if point to be setout is to the right of the actual direction.
△ Longitudinal offset: positive if point to be staked out is further away.
△ Height offset: positive if point to be staked out is higher than measured point.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① Set the seires of data of 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
stake-out point. Press FIND : *
PtID: 5
navigation key to select
Type: Known
the point to be staked out. You △Hz : -85°51′31″
can also call up it from the job △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
by inputting the stake-out PtID △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
in Pt Search menu. All DIST RECORD ↓

76

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
②Press [PAGE]to turn to Page PAGE PtID : 5
+ Type: Meas.
2, and press navigation key
R.HT : 2.000 m
to move to R.HT item. Input
△L Off: ﹉ .﹉ m
the prism height. Input R.HT △T Off: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
△H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
③ Collimate on the prism, 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
press [F2] ([DIST]) to start FIND : *
PtID: 5
measurement and calculate the
Type: Known
stake-out factor offset between [F2] △Hz : -85°51′31″
measurement point and △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
stake-out point. △ : -0.019 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
④ Rotate the telescope until 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
the angle difference is 0°00′ FIND : *
PtID: 5
00″ and notify the surveyor to
Type: Known
move the prism. △Hz : 0°00′00″
·Arrowhead means: △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
:Westing the prism to the △ : -0.019 m
station. All DIST RECORD ↓

:Easting the prism to the


station.
⑤ Set the prism at 0° 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
direction of telescope and FIND : *
PtID: 5
collimate on it. Press [F2]
Type: Known
([DIST]) to start measurement [F2] △Hz : 0°00′00″
and calculate the stake-out △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
factor offset between the prism △ : -0 .019 m
and stake-out point. All DIST RECORD ↓

⑥ Move the prism northing or 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼


southing according to the FIND : *
PtID: 5
arrowhead until the “△ ”
Type: Known
displaying 0 m. △Hz : 0°00′00″
·Arrowhead means: △ : 0.000 m Ⅰ
: Southing the prism to the △ : -0 .019 m
station All DIST RECORD ↓

: Northing the prism to the


station.

77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑦When both△Hz and △ 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
are zero, it implies that the FIND : *
PtID: 5
current prism point is the
Type: Known
stake-out point. △Hz : 85°51′31″
△ means the fill/dig △ : 0.000 m Ⅰ
data. △ : -0 .019 m
: to dig. The value is the All DIST RECORD ↓

depth to dig.
: to fill. The Value is the
height to fill.
⑧ Stake-out of point is 【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
finished. Press navigation key FIND : *
PtID: 6
to select the next point to
Type: Known
be staked out. (Or call up the △Hz : 85°51′31″
existed PtID in the job via Pt △ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
Search function.) △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓

5.6.3 Orthogonal Stake Out


The position offset between measured point and stake out point is indicated in a longitudinal
and transversal element.

1: Actual 2: Point to be staked out


△Loff Longitudinal offset: positive if nominal point further away.
△TOff Transversal offset, perpendicular to line-of-sight: positive if nominal
point is the right of measured point.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLY
Press [PAGE] to turn to Page 2 【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
Orthogonal Stake Out, and PtID : 6
Type: Meas.
press to select the point
R.HT : 2.000 m
to be staked out. You can also PAGE
△L Off: ﹉ .﹉ m
call up the point to be staked △T Off: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
out by inputting the PtID in Pt △H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
Search function in Page 1.

78

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
PtID : 6
②Press navagation key to Type: Meas.
R.HT : 2.000 m
move to R.HT item and input Input prism
△L Off: ﹉ .﹉ m
the prism height. height △T Off: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
△H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
③ Collimate one the prism, 【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
press [F2] ([DIST]) to start PtID : 6
measurement and calculate the Type: Meas.
R.HT : 1.800 m
stake-out factor offset between [F2]
△L Off: 4.086 m
the station point and stake-ou △T Off: -2.361m Ⅰ
point. △H : 1.302 m
All DIST RECORD ↓

④Move the prism northing or 【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼


southing according to the PtID : 6
arrowhead until the △ Type: Meas.
R.HT : 1.800 m
Longitudinal offset displays 0
△L Off: 0.000 m
m. △T Off: -1.026 m Ⅰ
·Arrowhead means: △H : 0.802 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
: Southing the prism to the
station
: Northing the prism to the
station.

In Stake Out program, if “Fine


[r]” or “Tracking” is selected,
then the factor difference
between prism point and
stake-out point can be
displayed immediately, which
is quite convenient.
⑤Rotate the telescope until the 【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
△Transversal offset displays 0 PtID : 6
m, and notify the surveyor to Type: Meas.
R.HT : 1.800 m
move the prism.
△L Off: 0.000 m
·Arrowhead means: △T Off: 0.000 m Ⅰ
:Westing the prism to the △H : 0.822 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
station.
: Easting the prism to the
station.

79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑥ When both △L Off and △ 【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
T Off display 0 m, it implies PtID : 6
that the current prism point is Type: Meas.
R.HT : 2.000 m
the stake-out point.
△L Off: 0 .000 m
△ H means the fill/dig data. △T Off: 0 .000 m Ⅰ
: to dig. The value is the △H : 0.822 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
depth to dig.
: to fill. The Value is the
height to fill.
Stake-out of point is finished. 【Stake Out 】 2/3 ▼
Press navigation key PtID : 7
Type: Known
to select the next point to
R.HT : 2.000 m
be staked out. (Or call up the
△L Off: ﹉ .﹉ m
existed PtID in the job via Pt △T Off: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
Search function.) △H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓

5.6.4 Coordinate Offset Stake Out


Stake out is based on a coordinate system and the offset is divided into a north and east
element.

1:Actual 2: Point to be staked out


Meaning of several offsets in process of coordinate stake-out.
△X/△E: Offset of X coordinate between stake-out point and current measurement point.
△Y/△N: Offset of Y coordinate between stake-out point and current measurement point.

80

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① Press [PAGE] to turn to 【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
Page 3, an press navigation key PtID : 6
PAGE Type: Meas.
to select the point to be
R.HT : 2.000 m
staked out. You can also call up
△Y/E: ﹉ .﹉ m
the point to be staked out by △X/N: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
inputting the PtID in Pt Search △H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
function in Page 1.
【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
PtID : 6
②Press navigation key to Type: Meas.
Input prism
R.HT : 2.000 m
move to R.HT item and input height
△Y/E: ﹉ .﹉ m
the prism height. △X/N: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
△H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓
③Collimate one the prism, 【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
press [F2] ([DIST]) to start PtID : 6
measurement and calculate the Type: Meas.
R.HT : 2.000 m
stake-out factor offset between [F2]
△Y/E: 2.785 m
the station point and stake-out △X/N: 2.698 m Ⅰ
point. △H : 0.396 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
④ Northing the prism in E 【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
direction until △Y/E displays PtID : 6
0 m. Type: Meas.
R.HT : 2.000 m
When △ Y/E is positive, it
△Y/E: 0.000 m
means the stake-out point is on △X/N: 2.698 m Ⅰ
the right of measurement point. △H : 0.396 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
Move the prism rightward.
When △ X/N is negative, it
means the stake-out point is on
the left of measurement point.
Move the prism leftward.
⑤ Northing the prism on N 【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
direction until △X/N displays PtID : 6
0 m. Type: Meas.
R.HT : 2.000 m
When △ X/N is positive, it
△Y/E: 0.000 m
means the stake-out point is △X/N: 0.000 m Ⅰ
further. Move the prism further △H : 0.396 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
from the station.
When △ X/N is negative,
move the prism closer to
station.

81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑥ When both △Y/E and △ 【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
X/N display 0 m, it implies that PtID : 6
the current prism point is the Type: Meas.
R.HT : 2.000 m
stake-out point.
△Y/E: 0.000 m
△ H means the fill/dig data. △X/N: 0.000 m Ⅰ
△H is positive: To fill. The △H : 0.396 m
All DIST RECORD ↓
value is the height to fill.
△H is negative: To fill. The
value is the depth to dig.
⑦Stake-out of point is finished. 【Stake Out 】 3/3 ▼
Press navigation key PtID : 7
Type: Meas.
to select the next point to
R.HT : 2.000 m
be staked out. (Or call up the
△Y/E: ﹉ .﹉ m
existed PtID in the job via Pt △X/N: ﹉ .﹉ m Ⅰ
Search function.) △H : ﹉ .﹉ m
All DIST RECORD ↓

5.6.5 B&D
Press [B&D], input the elements of polar stake-out: azimuth and horizontal distance. After
inputting, you can start to stake out the azimuth and horizontal distance you input.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Stake Out 】 1/3 ▼
Find: *
PtID: 5
Type: Known
△Hz : -85°51′31″
△ : 2.055 m Ⅰ
①Press [F4] ([↓]) twice to [F4] △ : ﹉ .﹉ m
turn to Page 3 of keys. All DIST RECORD ↓

VIEW EDM ENH ↓

B&D MANUAL |←

【New Point(SideShot)】
Input TGT Pt AZ & Dist.!

② Press [F1] ([B&D]) to [F1] PtID: ﹉﹉


display as the right dialog. AZ: ﹉°﹉′﹉″
: ﹉ .﹉ m
BACK

82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【New Point(SideShot)】
③ Input the PtID, AZ and Input PtID, Input TGT Pt AZ & Dist!

HD of the point to be staked AZ, HD PtID: 50


out. After inputting, press + AZ: 26°00′00″
[ENT] to move to next item. [ENT] : 10.000 m
01
※1) INSERT DELETE CLEAR
④ Collimate one the prism, 【Side Shot Stake Out】
press [F2] ([DIST]) to start
PtID: 50
measurement and calculate
△Hz : -85°51′31″
the stake-out factor offset [F2]
△ : 10.000 m
between the station point and Ⅰ
stake-ou point.
NewPt2 DIST RECORD BACK
⑤Rotate the telescope until 【Side Shot Stake Out】
the △HZ displays 0°00′00″,
PtID: 50
and notify the surveyor to
△Hz : -85°51′31″
move the prism.
△ : 1.509 m
When △ Hz is positive, it Ⅰ
means the stake-out point is
NewPt2 DIST RECORD BACK
on the right of measurement
point. Move the prism
rightward.
When △ Hz is negative, it
means the stake-out point is
on the left of measurement
point. Move the prism
leftward.
⑥ Set the prism on 0 【Side Shot Stake Out】
direction of telescope, press
PtID: 50
[F2] ([DIST]) to start [F2]
△Hz : 0°00′00″
measurement and calculate
△ : 1.509 m
the stake-out factor offset I
between the station point and
NewPt2 DIST RECORD BACK
stake-ou point.
When △ is positive, it
means the stake-out point is
further. Move the prism
further from the station.
When △ is negative,
move the prism closer to
station.

83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑦ Move the prism according 【Side Shot Stake Out】
to arrowhead until“△ ”
PtID: 50
displays 0 m. If “Fine (r)” or
△Hz : 0°00′00″
“Tracking” is selected to stake
△ : 0.000 m
out, the factor offset between Ⅰ
prism point and stake-out NewPt2 DIST RECORD BACK
point will be displayed at real
time, which is quite
convenient.※2)
⑧ After staking out one 【New Point (Side Shot)】
Input TGT Pt AZ & Dist.!
point, press [F1] ([NewPt2])
PtID: ﹉﹉
and repeat procedure ②~⑦ AZ: ﹉°﹉′﹉″
to proceed the input and : ﹉ .﹉ m
stake-out operation of next
B&D method. BACK

※1) The data input for B&D Stake-Out will not be stored in the job.
※2) Press [F4] ([BACK]) to return to Stake Out main menu.

5.7 FREES STATION


The application “Free Station” is used to determine the instrument position from
measurements to a minimum of two known points and a maximum of five known points.
The following measurements sequence to target points are possible:
1. HZ-angle and V-angle onely
2. Distance and HZ-angle and V-angle
3. HZ-angle and V angle to some points and HZ-angle and V angle plus distance to
other points.
The final calculated results are Easting, Northing and Height of the present station, including
the instruments’ HZ-circle orientation. Standard deviations and rediduals for accuracy assessments
are provided.
Measuring Facilities:
1. Single face I or II measurements are always applicable.
2. There is no specific point sequence or specific face sequecens that are required.
3. Gross errorss checks are made for dual face measurements in order to the same point(s)
are sighted with the other face.
4. If a target point is measured several times in the same telescope position, the last valid
measurement is used for calculation.
Measurement Restrictions:
Status of a height of 0.000 m of the target point
If target points hava a valid height of 0.000m, use 0.001 m to enable it for height processing.
Computation Procedure
The measuring procedure automatically determines the method of evaluation, e.g. resection,
3 point resection, etc.
If more than the minimum required measurements are performed, the processing routine uses

84

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


a least squares adjustment to determine the plan position and averages orientation and heights.
1. The original averaged face I and face II measurements enter the computation process.
2. Easting and northing is determined by the method of least squares, including standard
deviation and improvements for HZ-direction and horizontal distances.
3. The final height is computed from averaged height differences based on the original
measurement.
4. The HZ-circle orientation is computed with the original averaged face I and face II
measurements and the final computed plan position.
OPERRATION PROCEURE:
OPERRATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Programs】 1/3 ▼
① Press [F3] in Programs
F1 Surveying (1)
menu to enter into Free Station [F3] F2 Stake Out (2)
F3 Free Station (3)
function.
F4 COGO (4)

【Free Station 】
[ ]F1 Setting Job (1)
② Press [F1] in Free Station
[ ] F2 Setting Limit (2)
menu to set the job. [F1]
F4 Start (4)

③Select or set up a job. 【Setting Job】 5/8


Selecting a job: press
JOB: SANDING
navigation key to select Name: ﹉﹉﹉
the job to be set, and press [F4] Date: 2006.08.05
Time: 16:02:09
([OK]).
Setting a job: press [F1] ADD OK
([ADD]) and input the detail of
new job, and press [F4] ([OK]).
【Setting Limit 】
Input Limit!
Status: ON
④ The screen returns to Free [F2] St. dev. Y/E : 0.000 m
Station menu. Press [F2] to set St. dev. X/N : 0.000 m
St. dev. H/Z : 0.000 m
limit.
St. dev. Ang: 0°00′00″
SET
⑤ Input the standard Input standard 【Setting Limit 】
Input Limit!
deviation. After inputting one deviations
Status: ON
item, and press [ENT]. After + St. dev. Y/E : 0.020 m
inputting all deviations, press [F4] St. dev. X/N : 0.020 m
St. dev. H/Z : 0.010 m
[F4] ([SET]), and the screen
St. dev. Ang: 0°00′00″
displays “Limit set already!”
SET
and returns to Free Station
menu.

85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Free Station STN Pt】
⑥ Press [F4] to start free [F4]
Stn. Pt:
station measurement. Set PtID Input station INS. Ht: . m
and height of the station. After PtID and
one setting, press [ENT]. After height
finishing inputting all items, +
INSERT DELETE CLEAR ALPH
press [F4] ([OK]). [ENT]

Input target 【Free-Station TGT Pt 】


⑦ Set target PtID and prism PtID and
PtID : 2
height. After inputting, press R.HT R.HT : ﹉.﹉ m
[F3] ([OK]). ※1) +
[F3] SEARCH LIST OK BACK
【Free-Station Measure】

PtID : 2
⑧ Collimate on target point 1 R.HT : 2.000 m
and press [F3] ([DIST]) to start [F3] HZ: 38°20′06″
V: 20°00′05″
measurement.
: ﹉.﹉ m Ⅰ

RESULT Next Pt All ↓


⑨ After finishing the 【Free-Station TGT Pt】
measurement of one point,
PtID : 2
press [F2] to proceed the R.HT : ﹉.﹉ m
measurement of next point and [F2]
SEARCH LIST OK ↓
repeat procedure ⑦, ⑧. If the
point measured is to be ENH SKIP BACK ∣←
remeasured, press [F2]
([SKIP]) in Page 2 without
inputting PtID.

86

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Limit Check】

St.DevY0 : 1.001 m
St.DevX0: 1.569 m
St.DevH0 : 10.000 m
StDevAng : 0°00′20″
Continue?
BACK OK
St.Dev E0,N0, H0: Standard deviation of the
station coordinates
St.DevAng : Standard deviation of the
orientation
Press[OK]:
【Free-Station Result】
Stn.ID : OCC1
⑩ When there are at least 2 INS.Ht: 1.569 m
points and 1 side are measured, Y0/E0 : 10.000 m
X0/NO : 10.001 m
the station coordinate can be
H0 : 10.000 m
calculated and displayed.
Press [F1] to view the result BACK RESID StdDev OK

that shows the coordinate limit (Press[F2] to display the residuals. Press [F3]

between the result and station to display to standard deviation. Press [F4] to

point. Press [F4] ([OK]) to set the displayed coordinates and instrument

display the station coordinate. height as new station.)


Press [BACK] to measure a known point.
【Free-Station Measure】 1/5
Pt.ID: 2
R.HT: 2.000 m
HZ : 38°20′06″
V: 20°00′05″
: ---.--- m

BACK NesxPt All OK

Press[F2]to display the residuals:


Residual = Calculated value – Measured value
【Free-ST Residuals】 1/2

Pt.ID : 2
△Hz : 0°00′01″
△ : 0.001 m
△ : 0.002 m

BACK OK
Press navigation key to view the
residual of each point.
※1) Target point can be called up from job via [SEARCH] and [LIST], and also can be input
manually. Please refer to 5.2 Setting Station for detailed instruction.

Warnings/Messages
Important Messages Meaning
Selected point has no valid data ! This message occurs if the selected target point has no
easting or northing coordinate.

87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Max 5 points supported ! If 5 points have already been measured and another
point is selected. The system supports a maximum of
5 points.
Invalid data – no position computed! The measurements may not allow final station
coordinates (Eastings, Nortings) to be computed.
Invalid data – no height computed! Either the target height are invalid or insufficient
measurements are available to compute a final station
height.
Insufficient space in job! The present selected job is full and does not allow
further storage.
More points or distance required! There is insufficient data measured to be able to
compute a position. Either there are not enough points
used or not enough distances measured.
5.8 COGO
“COGO”
It is an application program to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as:
·Coordinate of points
·Azimuth between points
·Distance between points
The CoGo calculation methods are :
·Inverse
·Intersection
·Traverse
SOFT KEYS FUNCTIONS :
[MEAS] Jump to measurement dialog box to measure the point..
[CALC] Once the datum in need is imputted, start calculate.
[STAKE] Once computation point displyed , can select to staked out directly.

5.8.1 INVERSE & TRAVERSE


5.8.1.1 Traverse

The known data in graphic :


P1 The known point
α Direction from P1to P2
d1 Slope distance from P1to P2
d2 offset right that is positive
d3 offset Left that is negative
The unknown datum:

88

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


P2 CoGo point
P3 CoGo point with positive offset
P4 CoGo point with negative offset

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY


【CoGo Main Menu】

F1 Inverse & Traverse


F2 Intersections
F3 Offset
F4 Extention
① In COGO Main Menu
press [F1], and press [F1] to [F1]
select Traverse function from [F1]
Inverse & Traverse menu. 【Inverse & Traverse】

F1 Traverse
F2 Inverse

② There are several A:Input point name ,press[SEARCH]


methods to obtain known 【Traverse】
PtID.
PtID: 2
A: AZ : ° ′ ″
Input the known PtID, and Input PtID H-Dist: . m
Offset: . m
press [F3] ([SEARCH]) to +
see if the point exists in Job. [F3] MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
If yes , continue inputting the LIST ENH ∣←
known points to the azimuth
of unkown point, distance
and deviation quantity; if this
point does not exist, you
need firstly to input B:Press[LIST], call up PtID from Job
coordinate of the known 【Pt Search】 1/10
1 Known
point and other information [F4] 2 Known
later on + 11 Known
15 Meas.
B: [F1] 21 Meas.
If you want to call up the 22 Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB OK
data from Job, directly press
C : Press [ENH] to input the PtID to be
[F1] ([LIST]).
[F4] calculated and coordinates
+
[F2]
C:
If you want to directly input
coordinate, press
[F2]([ENH]) key.

89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Traverse】
Job : 2
PtID :
[F1] Y/E : . m
X/N : . m
D: +
H : . m
Also, you may press [F1] [F1]
BACK SAVE
([All]) to start measurement or[F2]
function. In dialog showed + D:Press [All] or [DIST] +[RECORD] to start
as the right picture, press [F3] measurement.
[F1]([All]) or [F2]([DIST]) + 【COGO Measurement】
[F3]([RECORD]) to start PtID: 2
measuring unknown point R.HT: 2.000 m
HZ : 38°20′06″
and save the result. The
V: 20°00′05″
result is used for calculation. : . m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD EDM

【COGO New Point】


③ As all the known PtIDs
New Pt:
have been input, press [ENT] Y/E : 20.000 m
to move to the azimuth X/N : 10.000 m
item, and continue inputting.
After finishing all inputting,
STAKE RECORD
press [F2] to compute the
result.

④If this point needs to be 【COGO New Point】


staked out ,input the PtID, Input new New Pt:
Y/E : 20.000 m
press [F1]([STAKE]). ※1) PtID X/N : 10.000 m
If it only needs to record the +
data, just press [F4]. ※ 2) [F1] STAKE RECORD
Here take staking out as an
example.
⑤ As the program displays 【COGO New Point】
“Record new point?”, press
[F4] ([OK]) to store new Record new point??
points in Job ,and start
staking out. CANCEL OK
If you press
[F1]([CANCEL]),
stake-out is started without
storing the data.
It is a must to name the
calculation result for COGO
so as to start staking out.

90

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑥ Collimate the prism 【COGO Stake Out】
center, input prism height, or PtID: 5
the H/Z if needed. Press R.Ht: 1.923 m
H/Z: 0.000 m
[F2] ([DIST]) to start [F2]
△Hz : 50°10′50″
measurement .If some more △ : 1.025 m Ⅰ
points are also needed to be △ : . m
staked out ,and as cursor All DIST RECORD EDM
staying on PtID item, press
navigation key to
select. ※ 3)
【COGO Stake Out】
⑦The factor offset between PtID: 5
stake-out point and R.Ht: 1.923 m
HT : 0.000 m
measurement point are
△Hz : 50°10′50″
displayed and computed in △ : 1.966 m Ⅰ
the screen. △ : 2.369 m
All DIST RECORD EDM

⑧ Rotate the telescope 【COGO Stake Out】


until “△Hz”item displays PtID: 5
0°00′00″, and order the R.Ht: 1.923 m
HT : 0.000 m
surveyor to move prism.
△Hz : 50°10′50″
△ Hz is positive : The △ : 1.966 m Ⅰ
stake-out point is on the right △ : 2.369 m
of current measurement All DIST RECORD EDM
point. Move the prism
rightward.
△ Hz is negative : The
stake-out point is on the left
of the current measurement
point. Move the prism
leftward.
⑨ Set the prism on zero 【COGO Stake Out】
direction of telescope and PtID: 5
collimate it, and press [F2] R.Ht: 1.923 m
HT : 0.000 m
([DIST]) to start
△Hz : 50°10′50″
measurement and calculate △ : 1.966 m Ⅰ
the facto offset between [F2] △ : 2.369 m
prism point and stake-out All DIST RECORD EDM
point.
△ is positive:Stake-out
point is further. Move prism
awau from the measurement
station.
△ is negative:Move

91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


prism closing to
measurement station.
⑩ Move prism forward/ 【COGO Stake Out】
backward according to the PtID: 5
R.Ht: 1.923 m
arrowhead until“△ ”
HT : 0.000 m
displays 0 m.※4)
△Hz : 50°10′50″
△H is positive:it needs to △ : 1.966 m Ⅰ
be filled. The height is the △ : 2.369 m
value diplayed. All DIST RECORD EDM
△H is negative:it needs to
be filled. The depth is the
value displayed.
※1)If staking out directly without inputting PtID of new point, the procedure will display
“Invalide PtID!”
※2)If to launch Traverse function again, press [ENC].
※3)The Traverse result is the plane value. Therefore, in the process of stake-out, if H/Z is needed,
input it seperately.
To change EDM setting, press [F4].
※4) Selecting Fine (r) or tracking measurement method to stake out can display the factor offset
between prism point and stake-out point on real time.

5.8.1.2 Inverse

The known data: P1 The first known point


P2 The second known point
The unknown data: α Direction from P1 to P2
d1 Slope distance between P1 and P2 .
d2 Horizontal distance between P1 and P2
d3 Height distance between P1 and P2
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Inverse & Traverse】
① In Inverse & Traverse
F1 Traverse
manu, press [F2], and enter [F2] F2 Inverse
into Inverse function.

92

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Inverse】
②Input PtID of one known Input PtID1
From : --- --- ---
point, and press [ENT] to + To --- --- ---
move to next item. [ENT]
※1)
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓

【Inverse】
Input PtID2
From : 21
③Input the PtID of another + To : --- --- ---
known point, and press [ENT]
[ENT].
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓

【Inverse Result】
Point 1: 21
Point 2: 22
④ Press [F2]([CALC]) to [F2] AZ : 90°00′00″
diplay the result. △ : 10.000 m
△ : 10.000 m
△ : 0.000 m
RECORD
⑤ To record the result, 【Inverse】
press [F4].
From :
To quit the result menu, To:
press [ESC] to proceed the
next Inverse function.
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
※1) There are four approaches to obtain the known PtID. Please refer to Procedure② of the
last section “5.8.1.1Traverse”.

5.8.2 INTERSECTIONS
5.8.2.1 Bearing-Bearing

The known data:


P1 P1 The first known point
P2 The second known point
α1 Direction from P1 to P3
α2 Direction from P2 to P3

93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The unknown data: P3 COGO point
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【COGO Main Menu】

F1 Inverse & Traverse


F2 Intersections
F3 Offset
F4 Extention
①In COGO Main Menu, press
[F2]
[F2], then in Intersection menu, [F1]
press [F1] , to enter into
Bearing-Bearing Intersection
【Intersections】
function.
F1 Bearing-Bearing
F2 Bearing-Distance
F3 Distance- Distance
F4 By Points

【Bearing-Bearing】
Input data!
Input PtID1
Point 1: 10
②Input PtID of known point + AZ : --- °---′---″
P1, and press [ENT] to move to [ENT] Point 2: ---
AZ: ---°---′---″
the next item.
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←

【Bearing-Bearing】
Input data!
Point 1: 10
③Input the azimuth from P1 to Input AZ1 AZ : 45°00′00″
P3 and press [ENT] to move to + Point 2: ﹉
AZ: ---°---′---″
next item. [ENT]
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Bearing-Bearing】
Input data!
④Input PtID of another known Input PtID2
Point 1: 10
point P2, and press [ENT] to + AZ : 45°00′00″
move to the next item. Repeat [ENT] Point 2: 11
AZ: ---°---′---″
procedure②.
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Bearing-Bearing】
Input data!
Point 1: 10
⑤Input the azimuth from P2 to Input AZ2 AZ : 45°00′00″
P3, and press [ENT]. + Point 2: 11
AZ: 315°00′00″
[ENT]
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓

94

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


LIST ENH ∣←

⑥ Press [F2] ([CALC]) to 【COGO New Point 】


display the result. New Point: --- --- ---
Y/E : 50.000 m
To stake out this point, input [F2] X/N : 50.000 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to
start staking out.※2)
To save the data, press [F4]. STAKE RECORD
To quit result menu, press
[ESC] to return to inputting
data menu, and re-input the
data.
※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

5.8.2.2 Bearing-Distance Intersection

The known data: P1 The first known point


P2 The second known point
α Direction from P1 to P3 and P4
r Radius, viz distance from P2 to P3 or P4
The unknown data: P3 The first COGO point
P4 The second COGO point

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Intersections】
① In Intersections menu,
F1 Bearing-Bearing
press [F2] to enter into [F2] F2 Bearing-Distance
F3 Distance- Distance
Bearing-Distance Intersection
F4 By Points
function.

【Bearing-Distance】
Input data!
Point 1: 10
②Input PtID of the known P1 Input PtID1 AZ : ---°---′---″
point, and press [ENT] to move + Point 2: ---
H-Dist: ---.--- m
to next item.※1). [ENT]
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←

【Bearing-Distance】
Input data!
③ Input azimuth from P1 to Input
Point 1: 10
unknown points P3 and P4, and azimuth AZ : 45°00′00″
press [ENT] to move to next + Point 2: ---
H-Dist: ---.--- m
item. [ENT]
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Bearing-Distance】
Input data!
Input PtID2
Point 1: 10
④Input PtID of another known + AZ : 45°00′00″
point P2. Repeat procedure②. ENT] Point 2: 11
H-Dist: ---.--- m

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓


LIST ENH ∣←
【Bearing-Distance】
Input data!
⑤ Input horizontal distance Input HD
Point 1: 10
between P2 and P3 or P4, and + AZ : 45°00′00″
press [ENT]. [ENT] Point 2: 11
H-Dist: 2.000 m

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓


LIST ENH ∣←
⑥ Press [F2] ([CALC])to 【COGO New Point】
display the result. New Point : --- --- ---
Y/E : 114.142 m
To stake out this point, input X/N : 114.142 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to New Point 2: --- --- ---
Y/E : 85.858 m
start staking out .※2)
X/N : 85.858 m
To save the data, press [F4]. STAKE RECORD
To quit the result menu, press
[ESC] to return to data
inputting menu, and re-input
the data.

96

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

5.8.2.3 Distance-Distance Intersection

The known data: P1 The first known point


P2 The second known point
r1 Radius, as defined by the distance from P1 to P3 or P4
r2 Radius, as defined by the distance from P2 to P3 or P4
The unknown data : P3 The first COGO point
P4 Second COGO point
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Intersections】
①In Intersections menu, press
F1 Bearing-Bearing
[F3] to enter into Distance- [F3] F2 Bearing-Distance
F3 Distance- Distance
Distance Intersection function.
F4 By Points

【Distance-Distance】
Input data!
Input PtID1
Point 1: 10
②Input PtID of known point + H-Dist: ---.--- m
P1, and press [ENT] to move to [ENT] Point 2: ---
H-Dist: ---.--- m
next item. ※1)
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Distance-Distance】
Input data!
Input HD1
Point 1: 10
③ Input horizontal distance + H-Dist: 50.000 m
between P1 and P3 or P4 (rl). [ENT] Point 2: ---
H-Dist: ---.--- m

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓


LIST ENH ∣←

97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Distance-Distance】
Input data!
Input PtID2
Point 1: 10
④Input the known point P2. + H-Dist: 50.000 m
Repeat procedure ②. [ENT] Point 2: 11
H-Dist: ---.--- m
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Distance-Distance】
Input data!
Point 1: 10
⑤ Input horizontal distance Input HD2 H-Dist: 50.000 m
between P2 and P3 or P4 (r2). + Point 2: 11
H-Dist: 20.000 m
[ENT]
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
⑥ Press [F2] ([CALC]) to 【COGO New Point】
display the result. New Point : --- --- ---
Y/E : 4.000 m
To stake out this point, input X/N : -19.596 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to [F2] New Point 2: --- --- ---
Y/E : 4.000 m
start staking out .※2)
X/N : 19.596 m
To save the data, press [F4]. STAKE RECORD
To quit the result menu, press
[ESC] to return to data
inputting menu, and re-input
the data.
※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

5.8.2.4 By Points

The known data: P1 The first known point


P2 The second known points
P3 The third known points
P4 The fourth known points

98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


a Line from P1 to P2
b Line from P3 to P4
The unknown data: P5 COGO point

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY


① In Intersections menu, 【Intersections】
press [F2] to enter into By
F1 Bearing-Bearing
Points function. [F4] F2 Bearing-Distance
F3 Distance- Distance
F4 By Points

【By Points】
②Input PtID of the known P1, Input data!
Point 1: 10
and press [ENT] to move to Input PtID1 Point 2: --- --- ---
next item. ※1) + Point 3: --- --- ---
[ENT] Point 4: --- --- ---

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓


LIST ENH ∣←
【By Points】
Input Input data!
Point 1: 10
③ Input the other known P2,P3,P4 Point 2: 11
points P2, P3, P4 in the same + Point 3: 12
method, and press [ENT]. [ENT] Point 4: 13

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓

④ Press [F2] ([CALC]) to 【COGO New Point】


New Point : --- --- ---
display the result.
Y/E : 40.000 m
To stake out this point, input [F2] X/N : 40.000 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to
start staking out .※2) STAKE RECORD
To save the data, press [F4].
To quit the result menu, press
[ESC] to return to data
inputting menu, and re-input
the data.
※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.8.3 OFFSET
5.8.3.1 Distance-Offset

The known data: P1 Baseline start point


P2 Baseline end point
P3 Lateral point
The unknown data: d1 Difference in length/abzissa (HD)
d2 Lateral deviation/ordinate (Offset)
P4 Base point
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【COGO Main Menu】
① In COGO Main Menu,
F1 Inverse & Traverse
press [F3] to enter into Offset [F3] F2 Intersections
F3 Offset
function.
F4 Extention

② Press [F1] in Offset menu 【Offset】


to enter into Distance-Offset
F1 Distance - Offset
function. Define the baseline [F1] F2 Point- Offset
first.

【Distance- Offset】
Input Baseline!
Input PtID1
Point 1: 20
③Input PtID of the known P1, + Point 2: --- --- ---
and press [ENT] to move to [ENT] Input Pt-Offset!
OffsPt:: --- --- ---
next item. ※1)
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Distance- Offset】
Input Baseline!
Input PtID2
Point 1: 20
④ Input another PtID of the + Point 2: 21
known point P2, and press [ENT] Input Pt-Offset!
OffsPt:: --- --- ---
[ENT].
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓

100

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Distance- Offset】
Input Baseline!
Input offset
Point 1: 20
⑤Input PtID of target point P3, PtID Point 2: 21
and repeat the last procedure. + Input Pt-Offset!
OffsPt:: 8
[ENT] AB
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓

⑥ Press [F2] ([CALC]) to 【COGO New Point】


New Point : --- --- ---
display the result.
Y/E : 40.000 m
To stake out this point, input X/N : 40.000 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to [F2]
start staking out .※2) STAKE RECORD
To save the data, press [F4].
To quit the result menu, press
[ESC] to return to data
inputting menu, and re-input
the data.
※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

5.8.3.2 POINT-OFFSET

The known data: P1 Baseline start point


P2 Baseline end point
a Difference in length/ abscissa (HD)
b Lateral deviation / ordinate (Offset)
The unknown data: P3 Lateral point

101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【CoGo Main Menu】

F1 Inverse & Traverse


F2 Intersections
F3 Offset
F4 Extention
① Press [F3] in COGO Main
Menu, and press [F2] in Offset [F3]
menu to enter into Point-Offset [F2]
function. Define the baseline
first. 【Offset】

F1 Distance - Offset
F2 Point- Offset

【Point- Offset】
Define Baseline!
Input PtID1
Point 1: 20
② Imput point name of the + Point 2: --- --- ---
known P1 point,and press [ENT] Toff & Loff!
Line: --- --- ---
[ENT moving cursor to the next Offset : --- --- ---
line. ※1)
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←
【Point- Offset】
Define Baseline!
Input PtID2
Point 1: 20
③ Input another PtID of the + Point 2: --- --- ---
known point P2, and press [ENT] Toff & Loff!
Line: --- --- ---
[ENT]. Offset : --- --- ---

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓


【Point- Offset】
Define Baseline!
Input Toff &
Point 1: 20
④Input Toff & Loff, and press Loff Point 2: 22
[ENT]. + Toff & Loff!
Line: 12.000 m
[ENT] Offset : 20.200 m

MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓


⑤ Press [F2] ([CALC]) to 【COGO New Point】
New Point : --- --- ---
display the result.
Y/E : 22.627 m
To stake out this point, input X/N : -5.657 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to
start staking out .※2) STAKE RECORD
To save the data, press [F4].
To quit the result menu, press
[ESC] to return to data

102

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


inputting menu, and re-input
the data.

※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

5.8.4 EXTENSION
“Extension” is used to compute extension points from the baseline.

The known data: 1 Start point of baseline


3 End point of baseline
△L1,or △L2: Distance
The unknown data: P2, P4 Extended point
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【COGO Main Menu】
①In COGO main menu, press
F1 Inverse & Traverse
[F4] to enter into Extension [F4] F2 Intersections
F3 Offset
function. Define baseline
F4 Extention
firstly.

【Extention】
Define Extention!
Input start
Point 1: --- --- ---
② Input PtID of the start PtID of Point 2: --- --- ---
point 1of baseline, and press baseline H-Dist : ---.--- m
Selectt Base Pt!
[ENT]to move to next item.※ + Base Pt: --- --- ---
1) [ENT] MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
LIST ENH ∣←

103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Extention】
Define Extention!
Input end
Point 1: 20
③Input PtID of the end point 3 PtID of Point 2: 22
of baseline, and press [ENT]. baseline H-Dist : ---.---
m
+ Selectt Base Pt!
[ENT] Base Pt: --- --- ---
AB MEAS CALC SEARCH

【Extention】
Define Extention!
④Input the horizontal distance Input H-Dist
Point 1: 20
between extended point and + Point 2: 22
start point or end point, and [ENT] H-Dist : 20.000 m
Selectt Base Pt!
press [ENT] Base Pt: 20 AB
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
⑤Press navigation key to 【Extention】
Define Extention!
select the base points of
Point 1: 20
extended point and the point Point 2: 22
related to horizontal distance, H-Dist : 20.000 m
Selectt Base Pt!
i.e. to decide whether the Base Pt: 20 AB
horizontal distance is the MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
distance between extended
point and start point or end
point.
⑥ Press [F2] ([CALC]) to 【COGO New Point】
display the result. New Point:
Y/E : 20.000 m
To stake out this point, input X/N : 25.000 m
new PtID, and press [F1] to
start staking out .※2) [F2]
To save the data, press [F4]. STAKE RECORD
To quit the result menu, press
[ESC] to return to data
inputting menu, and re-input
the data.
※1) There are four methods to input the known PtID. Please refer to procedure② of the last
section“5.8.1.1Traverse”.
※2) The stake-out operation of is similar to that of Traverse”, which has been introduced
previously. Please refer to “5.8.1.1 Traverse”.

5.9 TIE DISTANCE


The application Tie Distance computes slope distance, horizontal distance, height difference
and azimuth of two target points measured online, selected from the internal memory or entered
manually.
User can select between two different methods:
[F1] Polygonal (A-B, B-C)

104

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[F2] Radial (A-B, A-C)

5.9.1 Polygonal (A-B, B-C)

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Programs】 1/3 ▼

F1 Surveying (1)
F2 Stake Out (2)
F3 Free Station (3)
F4 COGO (4)
① In Programs menu, press
[PAGE] to enter into Page 2, and PAGE
press [F1] to start Tie Distance [F1]
measurement. 【Programs】 2/3

F1 Tie Distance (5)


F2 Area(Plan) (6)
F3 Remote Height (7)
F4 Reference Line/Arc (8)

②Set job, measurement station 【Tie Distance】


and orientation, and press [F4] to
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
start measurement (As the [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Setting Orientation (3)
method of setting job, station and
F4 Start (4)
orientation have been introduced
previously, it will not be repeated
here.)

105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Tie Distance】

Select Method!
③ Select the method of tie [F1] F1 Polygonal(A-B, B-C)
distance measurement. Here, take F2 Radial (A-B,A-C)

F1 Polygonal for example.

④ Several methods are Input first A:Input PtID to start measurement


target PtID, 【Polygonal】 1/2
available to obtain the points R.Ht
+ Point 1: 1
applied in tie distance.
[F1] R.HT: 1.500 m
A:Input PtID of the first target or[F1] : ---. --- m
point A1 and the prism height of +
[F2] : ---.--- m
that point. Collimate the prism : -.--- Ⅰ
certer and press [F1]([All]) or
MEAS CALC SEARCH ↓
[F1] ([DIST]) in Key’s Page 2 +
DIST RECORD EDM ↓
[F2] ([RECORD]) to start [F3]
ENH ∣←
measurement. B:Press [LIST] or [SEARCH] to call up the
B:Press [LIST]. In Pt Search point in job.
【Pt Search】 1/10
1 Known
dialog, through pressing to 2 Known
11 Known
call up PtID from job. 15 Meas.
21 Meas.
22 Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB OK
Input PtID
C: Input PtID and press [SEARCH]
+
C: Input PtID, and press [F2] 【Pt Search】
1 Known
[SEARCH] to see whether the
point exists in job. If yes,
proceed the next procedure; if
not, you need to input the [F4]
[F4] VIEW ENH JOB OK
coordinate of known point first.
[F1] D: Press [ENH] to input the coordinate.
【Coordinate Input】
Job: SANDING
D:Press [ENH] and input a PtID PtID : 2
that does not exist in job. Y/E : ---.--- m
X/N : ---.--- m
H : ---.--- m
BACK OK

【Polygonal】 1/2
Point 1: 1
⑤Set PtID of the second target Point 2: 2
R.HT : 1.500 m
Point B and prism height. The
: ---.--- m
operation is similar to the above. : ---.--- Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
All SEARCH LIST ↓

106

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑥Display result of Tie Distance. 【Tie Result 】 1/2 ▼
Point 1: 1
△ :The horizontal distance
betwenn Point A and Point B. Point 2: 2
Grade : -49.6%
△ : The slope distance
between Point A and Point B. △ : 0.663 m
△ : The vertical distance △ : 0.741 m
△ : -0.329 m
between Point A and Point B.
Pt1 Pt2 RADIAL
Slope: The slope between Point
A and Point B (%).
【Tie Result 】 2/2 ▼
⑦Press [PAGE] to turn to Page Point 1: 1
Point 2: 2
2. PAGE AZ : 173°12′53″
Azimuth:the azimuth between
Point A and Point B. PT1 PT2 RADIAL

Softkeys – polygonal method:


[F1]([NewPt1]): An additional missing line is computed. Program starts again (at point 1).
[F2]([New Pt2]): Point 2 is set as starting point of a new missing line. New point (Pt2) must be
measured.
[F4]([RADIAL]):Switch to radial method.

5.9.2 Radial (A-B, A-C)

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Tie Distance】
①Select Tie Distanc and press
Select Method!
[F2] to take Radial for [F2] F1 Polygonal(A-B, B-C)
example. F2 Radial (A-B,A-C)

【New Pt1】 1/2

Set central New Pt1: 1


②Set PtID of Central Point 1 PtID and R.HT: 1.500 m
R.Ht : ---.--- m
and prism height of that point.
: ---.--- m
※1) : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All SEARCH LIST ↓


【New Pt2】 1/2

Set end PtID New Pt1 : 1


③Set PtID of end Point A and and R.Ht. New Pt2 : 2
R.HT : 1.500 m
prism height .
: ---.--- m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
All SEARCH LIST ↓
④ Display result of Tie 【Tie Result】 1/2 ▼
Distance. NewPt1: 1
NewPt2: 2
△ :The horizontal distance Grade: -49.6%
betwenn Central Point 1 and
Point A. △ : 0.663 m
△ : The slope distance △ : 0.741 m
between Central Point 1 and △ : -0.329 m
Point A. NewPt1 NewPt2 POLY
△ :The vertical distance
between Central Point 1 and
Point A.
Slope: The slope between Point
A and Point B (%).
【Tie Result】 2/2 ▲
NewPt1: 1
AZIMUTH : The azimuth
NewPt2: 2
between central point 1 and
AZ: 173°12′53″
point A

NewPt1 NewPt2 POLY

※1)There are many ways to set point names ,please refer to the last section“5.9.POLYGONAL”.
Softkeys – radial method:
[F1]([NewPt1]) : Determine new central point.
[F2]([NewPt2]): Determine new radial point.
[F4]([POLY]): Switch to polygonal method.

108

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.10 AREA MEASUREMENT (PLANE)
The application program Area is used to calculate online areas of a number of points
connected by straghts. The target points have to be measured, selected from memory or entered
manually via keyboard.

a: Start point
b: Perimeter, polygonal length from start point to
c: Calculated area always closed to the start point P1, projected onto the horizontal plane.
OPERATIONAL STEPS :
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

【Programs】 1/3 ▼

F1 Surveying (1)
F2 Stake Out (2)
F3 Free Station (3)
① In Programs menu, press F4 COGO (4)
[PAGE] to turn to Page 2. PAGE
And press [F2] to start Area [F2]
【Programs】 2/3
Measurement.
F1 Tie Distance (1)
F2 Area(Plan) (2)
F3 Remote Height (3)
F4 Reference Line/Arc (4)

109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② Set job, measurement 【Area】
station and backsight
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
orientation, and press [F4] to [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Setting Orientation (3)
start area measurement.
F4 Start (4)
(As the method of setting
job, station and orientation
have been introduced
previously, it will not be
repeated here.).
③ Several methods to A:Input PtID to start measurement.
obtain points applied in area 【Area 】 1/2
Input first
target PtID PtID: 1
measurement are available.
and R.Ht R.HT: 1.500 m
A:Input PtID of the first + : ---.--- m
target point and the prism [F1]
or[F1] NoPts : 0
height of that point. + Area : 0.000 m2 Ⅰ
Collimate the prism center [F2]
All EDM RESULT ↓
and press [F1] ([All]) or [F1] DIST RECORD LIST ↓
([DIST]) + [F2] ENH SEARCH ∣←
([RECORD]) to start
measurement. B:Press[LIST] to call up directly PtID from job
[F3] 【Pt Search】 1/10
1 Known
B:Press [LIST], in Pt Search
2 Known
11 Known
dialog, press to call up 15 Meas.
21 Meas.
PtID directly from job. 22 Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB OK

C:Input point name ,press[SEARCH] C:


C: Input PtID, and press 【Pt Search】
Input point
[SEARCH] to see whether 1 Known
name
the point exists in job. If yes, +
[F2]
proceed the next procedure;
if not, you need to input the
coordinate of known point VIEW ENH JOB OK
[F4]
first.
[F4] D:Press[ENH] to input the coordinate.
[F1]
D:Press [ENH] and input a
PtID that does not exist in
job.

110

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Area】 1/2
④ Set other PtIDs to be PtID: 4
measured and prism height. R.HT: 2.000 m
: ---.--- m
The method is similar to the
NoPts : 4
above. ※1) AREA: 20.158 m2 Ⅰ
All EDM RESULT ↓
⑤ Points that are applied in 【Area Result 】
area calculation will be
NoPts : 4
counted by program, and Area: 20.158 m2
displayed in the fifth line. If Area: 0.000 ha
Girth: 11.025 m
a minimumof 3 points are
measured, press [F3[ to view NEW AddPt
the result.
※1)To change EDM setting, press [F2].
Softkeys:
[F1]([NEW]):To start new area measurement. Point number counts from 0.
[F4]([AddPt):To add new measurement based on current area measurement. Point number counts from the exsited
record.

5.11 REMOTE HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (REM)


If the prism cannot be put at the point to be measured, user can firstly collimate base prism
below it and measure the horizontal distance. Then collimate the remote point to calculate the
vertical difference.

1: Target point (remote point) 2:Height difference


3: Slope distance 4:Base point
Known prism height (Example: prism height (h)=1.500m)
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Programs】 1/3 ▼

F1 Surveying (1)
F2 Stake Out (2)
F3 Free Station (3)
①In Programs menu, press
F4 COGO (4)
[PAGE] to turn to Page 2, PAGE
and press [F3] to start [F3]
Remote Height
measurement. 【Programs】 2/3

F1 Tie Distance (1)


F2 Area(Plan) (2)
F3 Remote Height (3)
F4 Reference Line/Arc (4)

【Remote Height】
② Set job, measurement
[ * ] F1 Setting Job (1)
station and backsight [ * ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ * ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
orientation, and press [F4] to
F4 Start (4)
start area measurement.
(As the method of setting
job, station and orientation
have been introduced
previously, it will not be
repeated here.).
【Base Point】
Sight Meas Base Pt!
③Input PtID of base point, Input base
PtID Pt : 10
and press [ENT]. + R.HT: 1.000 m
[ENT] : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓


【Base Point】
④ Input the known prism Sight Meas Base Pt!
height (Here, take h=1.500 Input1.500
+ Pt : 10
for example), and press [ENT] R.HT: 1.500 m
[ENT]. : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓


⑤Collimate the prism center 【Remote Point】
and press [F1] ([All]) or [F1] [F1] Sight Meas REM Pt!
([DIST]) + [F2] or[F2]
+ BasePt : 10
([RECORD]) to start [F3] R.HT: 1.500 m
measurement. The position : ---.--- m Ⅰ
of the base point is set.
BasePt SAVE

112

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Remote Point】
Sight Meas REM Pt!
Base Point : 10
⑥ Aim at the target point
Rem. Pt: 11
(remote point). The result
: 1.758 m
will be viewed. △ : 3.051 m Ⅰ
H : 2.421 m
BasePt SAVE

PRISM HEIGHT IS UNKNOWN:


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Remote Height】
①First finish settings of job,
[ * ] F1 Setting Job (1)
station and orientaion, and [F4] [ * ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ * ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
press [F4] to start Remote
F4 Start (4)
Height measurement.

【Base Point】
②Press [F4]([↓]) under the Sight Meas Base Pt!
screen of Remote Height
Pt : 10
measurement menu to turn to [F4] R.HT: 1.500 m
next key page. : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓


R.HT EDM ∣←

【Base Point】
③Press [F1] ([R.Ht])to enter Sight Meas Base Pt!
into remote-height [F1]
Pt : 10
measurement mode of
unknown prism height . : ---.--- m Ⅰ

BACK EDM ∣←

【Base Point】
④Press [F4]([|←]) to return [F4] Sight Meas Base Pt!
to previous page key. Input Input base
Base Point: 10
PtID of base point, and PtID
collimate prism center, by + : ---.--- m Ⅰ
pressing [F1] ([All]) or [F2] [F1]
BACK EDM ∣←
([DIST]) + [F3] All DIST RECORD ↓
([RECORD]) to start
measurement.

113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤Screen displays horizontal 【Base Point】
distance between instrument Sight Meas Base Pt!
and prisms. BasePt: 10
R.HT : 0.000 m
[F1]([BACK]): Input and
: 1.968 m
measure a new base point. V: 92°05′52″ Ⅰ
BACK V-ANG
Aim at the 【Base Point】
⑥ Aim at the ground point top of the Sight Meas Base Pt!
(base point) where the prism prism BasePt: 10
R.HT : 0.000 m
is set, and press [F4] +
: 1.968 m
([V-ANG]). The base point is [F4] V: 92°05′52″ Ⅰ
set up. BACK V-ANG
【Remote Point】
Sight Meas REM Pt!
BasePt : 10
⑦ Aim at the target point
RemPt: 11
(remote height point) to view
: 1.969 m
the result. △ : 1.144 m Ⅰ
H : 2.014 m
BasePt SAVE

The related soft keys in hanging-height measurement :


[F1]([BasePt]): Input and measurement of a new base point.
[F4]([SAVE]): Saves the measured data.
5.12 STAKE OUT OF REFERENCE LINE / ARC
This program facilities the easy stake out or checking lines for buildings, sections of road,
simple excavations, etc.

5.12.1 Reference Line


A reference line can be defined by referencing a known base line. The reference line can be
offset either longitudinally, in parallel or vertically to the base line, or be rotated around the first
base point as required.

5.12.1.1 Definition of Base Line:


The base line is fixed by 2 base points that can be defined in 3 ways:
·Measured points
·Enter coordinates using keypad
·Selcet point from memory

114

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Entry graph:1 1st base point 2 2nd base point 3 Baseline 4 Reference line
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Programs】 2/3
①In Programs menu, press
F1 Tie Distance (5)
[PAGE] to turn to Page 2, PAGE F2 Area(Plan) (6)
F3 Remote Height (7)
and press [F4] to start +
F4 Reference Line/Arc (8)
reference line/arc stake-out. [F4]

② Set job, station and 【Reference Line/Arc】


orientation, and press [F4] to
[ * ] F1 Setting Job (1)
enter into reference line/arc [ * ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ * ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
Stake Out function. (As the
F4 Start (4)
method of setting job, station
and orientation have been
introduced previously, it will
not be repeated here.)
③ Select measurement 【Reference Line/Arc 】
methods:reference line or
Select Method!
reference arc. Here select F1: [F1] F1 Reference Line
F2 Reference Arc
Reference Line for example.

115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


④ Several methods to
define PtID of reference line
are available.

A:Input PtID and start measurement.


A:Input PtID of the first Input 1st base 【Baseline Define】1/3 ▼
PtId & R.Ht
base point, and prism height. + Meas First Pt!
Collimate the prism center, [F1] Point: 10
or[F1]
and press [F1] ([All]) + [F2] + R.HT: 1.000 m
([RECORD]) and start [F2] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
measurement. : ---.--- m
BACK EDM ∣←

DIST RECORD EDM ↓

[F3] B:Press[List],dispatch point name directly from


B:Press [LIST], in Pt Search Job
【Pt Search】 1/10
dialog, press to call up 1 Known
2 Known
PtID directly from job. 11 Known
15 Meas.
21 Meas.
22 Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB OK

C: Input PtID, and press Input PtID


+ C:Input point name ,press[SEARCH]
[SEARCH] to see whether [F2] 【Pt Search】
the point exists in job. If yes, 1 Known

proceed the next procedure;


if not, you need to input the
coordinate of known point
first. VIEW ENH JOB OK

D:Press[COORDINATE],input E,N,Z coordinat


[F4]
[F4] 【Coordinate Input】
D:Press [ENH] and input a [F1] Job: SANDING
PtID that does not exist in PtID : 2
Y/E : ---.--- m
job.
X/N : ---.--- m
H : ---.--- m
BACK OK

【Baseline Define】1/3 ▼
Meas First Pt!
⑤ Set PtID of the second Point 1: 10
Point 2: 11
base point and prism height. R.HT: 1.000 m
Method is similar to the : ---.--- m Ⅰ
above.※1),※2 : ---.--- m
All SEARCH ↓

116

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Ref.Line Define 】
Baseline Shifts!
△ : 1.369 m
⑥ Baseline is defined. Offset: 0.000 m
Line : 0.000 m
H/Z : 0.000 m
Retate: 0°00′00″
NewBL MEAS STAKE 0SET
※1) To change the EDM setting, press [F3].
※2) Press [PAGE] to view other pages.

5.12.1.2 Reference Line


In the process of using base line, the base line can be offset longitudinally, parallel and
vertically or rotated. This new line is called the reference line. All measured data refers to the
reference line.

Definition of Reference Line:


【Ref.Line Define】
Baseline Shifts!
△ : 1.369 m
Offset: 0.000 m
Line : 0.000 m
HZ : 0.000 m
Rotate: 0°00′00″
NewBL MEAS STAKE 0SET

Offset: Parallel offset of the reference line to the right, referred to the direction of the base line.
Line: Longitudinal offset of the start point (=reference point) of the reference line in the direction
of base point.
HZ: ight offset; the reference line is higher than the selected reference height.
Rotate: Rotation of the reference line clockwise around the reference point.

The meaning of soft keys under the screen of Ref.Line Define.


[F1]([NewBL]): Return to Ref.Line Define screen to re-define base line.
[F2]([MEAS]): The offset value of point to be measured related to the reference line.

117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


[F3]([STAKE]): Activate the Orthogonal Stake Out.
[F4]([0SET]): Set all offset values/rotate to zero.

5.12.1.3 “Line & Offset” Subapplication


The ‘Line & Offset’ subapplication calculates from measurements or coordinate
longitudinal, parallel offsets, and height differences of target point relative to reference line.

Always computes the height with the height difference of the first reference point (△ )

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Baseline Define】1/3 ▼
Meas First Pt!
Point 1: 10
① Set the base line as
introduced before.※1) R.HT: 1.000 m
: 1.968 m Ⅰ
: 1.596 m
All SEARCH ↓

【DefLine Define 】
Baseline Shifts!
② After defining base line, Input
△ : 0.369 m
input offset, line, HZ and rotate offset, line,
Offset : 0.000 m
to define the reference line. H/Z and Line : 0.000 m
rotate. H/Z : 0.000 m
Rotate : 0°00′00″
NewBL MEAS STAKE 0SET

118

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Line Offset Meas 】
③Press [F2] to start measure PtID : 10
offset longitudinal, cross and [F2] R.HT: 1.000 m
△Loff : ---.--- m
height difference of the target
△Toff : ---.--- m
point related to the reference △ : ----.--- m Ⅰ
line.
All DIST RECORD ↓
④ Input PtID of the target 【Line Offset Meas 】
point to be measured and prism PtID : 10
height, and collimate the prism R.HT: 3.000 m
△Loff : 1.025 m
center, press [F1] ([All]) or [F1]
△Toff : 2.037 m
[F2] ([DIST]) + [F3] or[F2] △ : 1.410 m Ⅰ
([RECORD]) to start +
All DIST RECORD ↓
measurement. [F3]
After finishing one point,
collimate the next target point,
and start measurement in the
same method.

For any of the known points and measurement points ,this procedure can also compute the offset
of longitude and latitude of these points relevant to reference line.

119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤ Several methods to define 【Line Offset Meas 】
PtID of reference line are PtID : 10
available. ※2) ~※3). R.HT: 1.000 m
△Loff : . m
△Toff : . m
△ : . m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓


BACK EDM LIST ↓
ENH VIEW SEARCH ∣←
A:Press [LIST], in Pt Search A :Press[LIST],dispatch directly point name
[F3]
from Job
dialog, press to call up PtID 【Pt Search】 1/10
1 Known
directly from job. 2 Known
11 Known
15 Measurement
21 Measurement
22 Measurement
VIEW ENH JOB OK

B:Input point name ,press[SEARCH]


B: Input PtID, and press Input PtID
【Pt Search】 1/2
[SEARCH] to see whether the +
[F2] 1 Known
point exists in job. If yes, 2 Meas.

proceed the next procedure; if


not, you need to input the
coordinate of known point first. VIEW ENH JOB OK

[F4] C:Press[ENH] to input E,N,Z coordinate.


C: Press [ENH] and input a PtID
[F4]
that does not exist in job. [F1] 【Coordinate Input】
Job: SANDING
PtID : 2
Y/E : ---.--- m
X/N : ---.--- m
H : ---.--- m
BACK OK

【Line Offset Meas 】


⑨ Display the offset of latitude PtID : 10
and longitude of this known R.HT: 2.000 m
△Loff : 0.425 m
point or measurement point
△Toff : -2.037 m
related to reference line. △ : 2.010 m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓


※1)The way to define base line is referred to“5.12.1.1Definition of Base Line”.
※2) To re-define reference line, press [F1]([BACK]).
※3)To see the information of known points or measurement points, press [F2]([EXAMINE]).

5.12.1.4 Orthogonal Stake-Out


User can enter longitudinal, transverse and height offsets for the target points to be set-out
related to the reference line. The program calculates the difference between a measured point and

120

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


the calculated point. The program displays the orthogonal (pLine, pOffset, p ) and the polar
(pHz,△ ,△ ) differences.

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIOAL STEP OPERATION DISPLAY
①After the base line and reference 【RefLine Define】
Baseline Shifts!
line are defined in the method
△ : 1.369 m
introduced before, press [F3] to enter [F3]
Offset : 0.000 m
into Orthogonal Stake Out function. Line : 0.000 m
H/Z : 0.000 m
Rotate : 0°00′00″
NewBL MEAS STAKE 0SET
②Input the PtID to be staked out and 【Input Orthogonal】
Input Orthogonal!
the prism height and longitude and
PtID : 11
latitude offset of stake-out point R.HT : 1.560 m
related to reference line. After Offset : 1.000 m
Line : 1.900 m
finishing inputting, press [F4]([OK])
H/Z : 2.050 m
to start staking out.※1). BACK 0SET OK
【Input Orthogonal】
③Collimate the prism center, and PtID : 11
press [F1]([DIST]) to start R.HT : 2.000 m
△Hz : -10°10′05
measurement. To re-define reference [F1]
△ : 0.582 m
line, press [F4]([↓]), and press [F3] △ : ---.--- m I
([RefLn]). DIST RECORD NextPT ↓
All EDM Ref.Ln ∣←

121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


④ The result displayed is the 【Input Orthogonal】
correction value which is calculated PtID : 11
by minusing actual value from R.HT : 2.000 m
△Hz : -59°11′25
measurement value. All symbols are
△ : 1.368 m
identical to Program “5.6 STAKE △ : 0.582 m I
OUT”. DIST RECORD NextPT ↓
△ Hz : Positive from clockwise to
stake-out point.
△ :Positve when stake-out point
is further than measurement point.
△ : Positve when stake-out
point is higher than measurement
point.

【Input Orthogonal】 1/2


Press [PAGE] to display Page 2 of
PtID : 11
Stake Out menu. R.HT : 2.000 m
△:Longitude offset. Positive when △ : -2.021 m
stake-out point is put further. △ : -0.015 m
△H: 0.582 m I
△:Latitude offset. intercrossing with
DIST RECORD NextPT ↓
eyesight orthogonally. Positive when
stake-out point is put on the right side
of current measurement point.
⑤ Method of stake-out is the same to 【Input Orthogonal】 1/2
the other. When both.△Hz and △ PtID : 11
are zero, it means that the point R.HT : 2.000 m
△Hz : 0°00′00
to be staked out is found; △
△ : 0.000 m
means fill/dig (positive: to fill; △ : 0.202 m I
negative: to dig).
After finishing staking out one point, DIST RECORD NextPT ↓
press [F3] to repeat②~⑤to proceed
stake-out of other points.※2)
※1)To set all offsets to zero,press[0SET]. To re-define reference line, press[BACK].
※2)To re-define reference line, press [F4]([↓]), then press [F3]([Ref.Ln]).

5.12.2 Reference Arc


This procedure allows user define a reference arc, and the measure or stake out with respect
to the arc.

122

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Odd: Perpendicular distance from arc.
All arc are difined in clockwise direction.
All calculations are made in two dimentions.
Procedure:
1. Define the arc.
2. Decide to measure or to stake out
1):’Line & Offset’measurement
2):Stake out of reference arc
a: stake-out point
b: stake-out arc
c: stake-out chord
d: stake-out central angle

5.12.2.1 Defining Reference Arc


OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Programs】 1/3 ▼

F1 Surveying (5)
F2 Stake Out (6)
F3 Free Station (7)
F4 COGO (8)

①In Programs menu, press


[PAGE] to turn to Page 2. PAGE
Then press [F4] to start [F4] 【Programs】2/3
Reference Line/Arc
F1 Tie Distance (5)
Stake-Out. F2 Area(Plan) (6)
F3 Remote Height (7)
F4 Reference Line/Arc (8)

② Set job, station and 【Reference Line/Arc】


orientation, and press [F4]to
[ * ]F1 Setting Job (1)
enter into Reference [ * ]F2 Setting Station (2)
[ * ]F3 Set Orientation (3)
Line/Arc Stake-Out function.
F4 Start (4)
(As the method of setting
job, station and orientation
have been introduced
previously, it will not be
repeated here.).

123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Reference Line/Arc】
③ Select measurement
Select Method!
method : reference line or [F2] F1 Reference Line
F2 Referemce Arc
reference arc.here choose
F2:reference line.

【Define Ref. Arc Method 】

F1 Certer Pt & Start Pt


④ Select the method to F2 Start Pt & EndPt & Radus
define reference arc.

When starting this application you were asked how to define arc. User can define it by:
a. Center Point & Start Point
b. Start Point, End Point, Radius

a) Center Point & Start Point


【Define Ref. Arc Method】
④Select the mehtod to define
F1 Certer Pt & Start Pt
reference arc:Centre Pt & Start F2 Start Pt & EndPt & Radus
Pt.

124

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤Set PtID of arc center and A:Input PtID to start measurement.
prism height. It can be 【Define Ref. Arc】 1/3 ▼
Sight Meas CerterPt!
measured, or called up from
Certer: 10
internal memory, or input ENH
manually. R.HT: 1.000 m

A:Input PtID of the first base : ---.--- m Ⅰ


Input PtID,
R.Ht : ---.--- m
point, and prism height. All SEARCH LIST ↓
+
Collimate the prism center, and [F1] DIST RECORD EDM ↓
press [F1] ([All]) + [F2] or[F1] ENH ∣←
+
([RECORD]) and start [F2]
measurement.

B:press[LIST],tp dispatch point name frpm the


B:Press [LIST], in Pt Search Job
[F3]
【Pt Search】 1/10
dialog, press to call up PtID 1 Known
2 Known
directly from job. 11 Known
15 Meas.
21 Meas.
22 Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB ↓
C:input point name ,press[SEARCH]
C: Input PtID, and press
Input PtID 【Pt Search】 1/2
[SEARCH] to see whether the 1 Known
+
point exists in job. If yes, [F2] 1 Meas.

proceed the next procedure; if


not, you need to input the
VIEW ENH JOB ↓
coordinate of known point first.
D:Press[ENH],input coordinate value of E,N,Z
[F4]
D: Press [ENH] and input a
[F4]
PtID that does not exist in job. [F1]

【Define Ref. Arc】 1/3 ▼


⑥ Set start PtID of arc and Sight Meas CerterPt!
Center: 10
prism height. The method is
StartP: 11
similar to the above. R.HT: 1.500 m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
All SEARCH LIST ↓

125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑦ After finishing defining 【Reference Arc-Window】
reference arc, prrogram enters
Center: 10
into the main menu:to decide StartP: 11
the next issue is measurement or End Pt: --- ---
Radius : 2.650 m
stake-out.
[F1]:Re-define reference arc NewArc MEAS STAKE
[F3]:Start measurement
[F4]:Start stake-out

b) Start Point, End Point, Radius


【Define Ref.Arc Method】
④ Select the mehtod to define
F1 Center Pt & Start Pt
reference arc: Start Point, End F2 StartPt & EndPt & Radus
Point, Radius.

【Define Ref.Arc】 1/3 ▼


Sight Meas Start Pt!
StartPt: 10
⑤Set start PtID of arc and prism
height.※1). R.HT: 1.000 m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
All SEARCH LIST ↓
【Define Ref.Arc】 1/3 ▼
Sight Meas End Pt!
StartP: 10
⑥Set end PtID of arc and prism
End Pt: 11
height. R.HT: 1.500 m
: ---.--- m Ⅰ
: ---.--- m
All SEARCH LIST ↓
【Reference Arc】 1/3
Input Arc Radius!
Input
⑦ Input radius, and press radius Radius: ---.--- m
[F4]([OK]). +
[F4]
OK

⑧ After finishing defining 【Reference Arc-Window】


reference arc, prrogram enters
Center: ----
into the main menu:to decide StartP: 10
the next issue is measurement or End Pt: 11
Radius : 12.650 m
stake-out.
[F1]:Re-define reference arc NewArc MEAS STAKE
[F3]:Start measurement
[F4]:Start stake-out
※1) Four approaches are available to define PtID of arc. Please refer to last section “Certer Poing
& Start Point”.

126

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


As arc is well according to the defining the mode selected, use should decide to measure or to
stake out.
[MEAS] Starts the subapplication to measure Line & Offset.
[STAKE] Starts the subapplication to stake out.

5.12.2.2 “Line & Offset” Subapplication


Here you can measure or select points from memory and you will see Line and Offset
referring to the arc.

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
【Reference Arc-Window】

Center: 10
StartP: 11
End Pt: --- ---
Radius : 2.650 m
[F3]
⑧ In Reference Arc-Window, NewArc MEAS STAKE
select measurement, and press
【Reference Arc-Window】
[F3] to enter into line and offset
measurement function. Certer: --- ---
StartP: 10
End Pt: 11
Radius: 12.650 m

NewArc MEAS STAKE

127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑨ Through measuring a target 【Line & Offset Measure】
point to be surveyed, or PtID: 21
selecting a point from job or R.HT: 2.000 m
Line: ---.--- m
inputting coordinate manually to
Offset : ---.--- m
decide the offset value of this △ : ---.--- m Ⅰ
point related to arc length of the
All DIST RECORD ↓
reference arc and radial offset.
BACK EDM LIST ↓
ENH VIEW SEARCH ∣←
A: A:Measure the point to be surveyed
Input PtID of the point to be 【Line & Offset Measure】
measured and prism height. PtID: 20
Collimate the prism center and R.HT: 1.850 m
Line: ---.--- m
press [F1] ([All]) or [F2]
Offset : ---.--- m
([DIST]) to start measurement. △ : ---.--- m Ⅰ
B:
All DIST RECORD ↓
Press[F4]([↓]) to view Page 2
B:Press [LIST], and select the point from job.
and press [F3] ([LIST]) to view
【Pt Search】 1/256
1 Known
all data in the job. Press to 2 Known
3 Known
select the data you need. 4 Meas.
5 Meas.
C:
6 Known
If the point to be calculated is
known, user can find the point C:Input the ID of point to calculated, press
through searching from job. [SEARCH].
Input the PtID, press [F4]([↓] 【Pt Search 】 1/3
21 Known
twice and press [F3] 21 Meas.
([SEARCH]) to display all data 21 Meas.
concerning the PtID in the job.
VIEW ENH JOB ↓
D:Input coordinate directly. D:Input diretlly the coordinate of the point to
calculated.
User also can directly input the
【Coordinate Input】
the coordinate to be calculated, JOB: SANDING
the program can compute and PtId: 21
Y/E : ---.--- m
display the result. Press [F4]
X/N : ---.--- m
([ ↓ ]) twice, then press [F1] H : ---.--- m
([ENH]) to input data.
BACK SAVE
Afterwards, save the data.
Program calculates the result
and returns to Line & Offset
Measure menu.

128

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑩ No matter the point is 【Line & Offset Measure】
measured, called up from job, or PtID: 21
input manually, the program will R.HT: 2.000 m
Line: 14.125 m
calculate the relation between
Offset: 2.364 m
the coordinate and the value of △ : 10.000 m Ⅰ
line & offset.
All DIST RECORD ↓
【Line & Offset Measure】
(11) Continue to display the PtID: 21
R.HT: 2.000 m
relation between next point and
Line. : ---.--- m
referecne arc in the same Offset: ---.--- m
method. △ : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓

5.12.2.3 “Stake Out” Subapplication

△Hz: Difference in horizonal angle


△HD: Difference in distance measurement
A negative line is impossible to be staked out.
The application provides 4 ways to stake out.

【Reference Arc-Window】
⑧ In Reference Arc-Window,
Center: 10
select measurement, and press [F3] StartP: 11
[F3] to enter into line and offset End Pt: - --- ---
Radius 2.650 m
measurement function.
NewArc MEAS STAKE
【Ref.Arc Stake Out Menu】
⑨ Here, four methods to stake
F1 Stake Out Point
out are available. User can select F2 Stake Out Arc
F3 Stake Out Chord
a suitable method according to
F4 Stake Out Angle
the pratical operation situation.

129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


a) Stake-Out Point
Point can be staked out by entering a line and an offset value.

dOffset: The perpendicular distance from stake out points to arc sect
dLine: The arc length from measurement point to stake-out point and vertical line of reference arc
(Line)
OPERATIONAL STEPS:

130

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Ref. Arc Stake Out Menu】
⑨ In Reference Arc-Window, select
F1 Stake Out Point
measurement, and press [F1] to enter F2 Stake Out Arc
F3 Stake Out Chord
into Stake Out Point function.
F4 Stake Out Angle

⑩ As the graph shows:input PtID of 【Stake Out Point 】


stake-out point, the arc length and
PtI: 20
offset. When finishing inputting one
item, press [ENT] to move to the Line: 0.000 m
Offset : 0.000 m
next. After all inputting, press
[F4]([OK]). 0SET OK
【Stake Out Reference Arc】
PtID: 21
(11) Input PtID of measurement point R.HT: 2.621 m
△Hz : -20°00′00″
and prism height, collimate the prism [F1]
△ : 1.369 m
center, press [F1] ([DIST]) to start △ : ---.--- m Ⅰ
measurement.※1) DIST RECORD NextPt ↓

All EDM BACK ∣←


(12) Program computes and displays 【Stake Out Reference Arc 】
stake-out offset values between the PtID: 21
prism point and stake-out point. All R.HT: 2.621 m
△Hz : -20°00′00″
symbols are in accordance with
△ : -2.082 m
Programs “5.6.2 Polar Stake Out”.※ △ : -0.019 m Ⅰ
2) DIST RECORD NextPt ↓
△ Hz : Poitive from clockwise
direction to stake-out point.
△ : Positive when stake-out
point is further than measurement
point.
△ :Positve when stake-out point
is higher than measurement point.
(13)When both △Hz and△ are 【Stake Out Reference Arc】
zero, it implies that the current prism PtID: 21
point is the stake-out point. R.HT: 2.621 m
△Hz : -0°00′00″
△ means the vale to fill/dig.
△ : 0.000 m
:means to dig. The value is the △ : -0.019 m Ⅰ
depth to dig.
: means to fill. The value is the DIST RECORD NextPt ↓

height to fill.

(14) After finishing staking out one 【Stake Out Point 】


point, press [F3] ([NextPt]) to return
PtID: 20
to Stake Out Point main menu. Input
Line and Offset, and repeat procedure Line : 0.000 m
Offset: 0.000 m
⑩~(13) to start the stake-out of next
point. OSET OK

131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


※1) To return to Reference Arc-Window, press [F3]([BACK]) in Key Page 2.
※2) The method to stake out is referred to “5.6.2 Polar Stake Out” Program.
b) Stake Out Arc
This allows to stake out a series of equidistant points along the arc.

OPERATIONAL STEPS :
【Ref.Arc Stake Out Menu】
⑨ In Ref.Arc Stake Out
F1 Stake Out Point
Menu, press [F2] to enter into [F2] F2 Stake Out Arc
F3 Stake Out Chord
Stake Out Arc function.
F4 Stake Out Angle

⑩As the graph shows:input 【 Stake Out Arc】


PtID of stake-out point by PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
pressing to select ArcLen: 0.000 m
distribution mode of misclosure, Arc Line: 0.000 m
Offset : 0.000 m
and press to move to the
next item. 0SET OK
(11) Input arc length to be staked 【Stake Out Arc】
out, program computes arc PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
length according to the ArcLen: 0.000 m
distribution mode of the selected Arc Line: 0.000 m
misclosure, and input the offset. Offset: 0.000 m

After inputting all items, press 0SET PT- PT+ OK


[F4] ([OK]).
By pressing [PT+] or [PT-] can
display and compute each arc
length to be staked out.

132

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(12) Input PtID of measurement 【Stake Out Reference Arc】
point and prism height, PtID: 21
collimate the prism center, and R.HT: 2.621 m
△Hz : -20°00′00″
press [F1] ([DIST]) to start
△ : -2.082 m
measurement, the program will △ : -0.019 m Ⅰ
compute the stake-out offset DIST RECORD NextPt ↓
values between prism point and
All EDM BACK ∣←
stake-out point. The method to
stake out is referred to the
Program “5.6.2 Polar Stake
Out”.※1)
(13) After finishing staking out 【Stake Out Arc】
one point, press [F3] ([NextPt]) PtID: 20
Miscls:: End Arc
to return to Stake Out Arc menu. [F3] ArcLen: 0.000 m
Press [F3]([PT+]) or [F2] ([PT-]) Arc Line: 0.000 m
Offset: 0.000 m
to start staking out the next
point.※2) 0SET OK
※1) To return to Reference Arc-Window, press [F3]([BACK]) in Key Page 2.
※2) The method to stake out is referred to “5.6.2 Polar Stake Out” Program.

Display content:
1.Misclosure: If the entered arc length is not an integer of the whole arc, there will be a
misclosure.
User has 3 options to distribute the misclosure:
1) Start arc: All of the misclosure will be added to the first arc-section.
2) No distribution: All of the misclosure will be added to the last arc-section.
3) Equal: The misclosure will be equally distribute between all sections.
2.Arc length:Enter the length of the arc-segment to be staked out.
3.Line: Shows the line-value of the stake-out point. This is calculated by the arc length and the
selected misclosure distribution.
4. Offset : Here you can enter the offset value.
Soft keys
[F1]([0SET]):Set the value to 0.
[F2]([PT-]) and [F3]([PT+]): Toggel through the calculated stake-out points.
[F4]([OK]): Proceed to Stake Out Measure dialog.

c) Stake Out Chord


This allows to take out a series of equidistant chords along the arc. The screen contents and
the buttom shown, are the same as described in “Stake Out Arc” section.

133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS:
【Ref.Arc Stake Out Menu】
⑨ Press [F3] to enter into Stake
F1 Stake Out Point
Out Chord function in Ref.Arc F2 Stake Out Arc
F3 Stake Out Chord
Stake Out Menu.
F4 Stake Out Angle

⑩ As the graph shows: Input 【Stake Out Chord】


PtID of stake-out point, PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
press to selet distribution ChordL: 0.000 m
mode of misclosure, and Line: 0.000 m
Offset: 0.000 m
press to move to next item.
0SET PT+ PT- OK
(11) Input arc length to be staked 【Stake Out Chord】
out, the program will compute PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
the line according to the selected ChordL: 0.000 m
distribution mode of End Arc. Line: 0.000 m
Then input the offset. As all Offset: 0.000 m

items are inputted, press [F4] 0SET PT+ PT- OK


([OK]).
Press[PT+] or [PT-] to display
each computed line to be staked
out.
(12) Input PtID of measurement 【Stake Out Chord】
point and prism height, PtID: 21
collimate the prism center, and R.HT: 2.621 m
△Hz : -20°00′00″
press [F1] ([DIST]) to start
△ : -2.082 m
measurement, the program will △ : -0.019 m Ⅰ
compute the stake-out offset
values between prism point and DIST RECORD NextPt ↓

stake-out point. The method to


stake out is referred to the
Program “5.6.2 Polar Stake
Out”.※1)

134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(13) After finishing staking 【Stake Out Chord】
out one point, press [F3] PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
([NextPt]) to return to Stake Out ChordL: 0.000 m
Arc menu. Press [F3]([PT+]) or Line: 0.000 m
[F2] ([PT-]) to start staking out Offset: 0.000 m

the next point.※2) 0SET OK


※1) To return to Reference Arc-Window, press [F3]([BACK]) in Key Page 2.
※2) The method to stake out is referred to “5.6.2 Polar Stake Out” Program.

The operation keys displayed in dialog of Ref.Arc Stake Out is in accordance with the one of
Stake Out Arc introduced previously.

d) Stake Out Angle


This allows to stake out a series of points along the arc defined by the angle substended at the
center of the angel. The screen contents and the buttons shown, are the same as described in
“Stake Out Arc” section.

β: Angle
OPERATIONAL STEPS
【Ref.Arc Stake Out Menu】
⑨In Ref.Arc Stake Out Menu,
F1 Stake Out Point
press F4 to enter into Stake Out F2 Stake Out Arc
F3 Stake Out Chord
Angle function.
F4 Stake Out Angle

⑩As the graph shows:imput 【Stake Out Angle】


PtID of stake-out point, and PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
press to select distribution Angle: 0°00′00″
mode of misclosure. Press to Line: 0.000 m
Offset: 0.000 m
move to the next item.
0SET PT+ PT- OK

135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(11) Input the angle to be staked 【Stake Out Angle】
out, the program will compute PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
the line according to selected Angle: 0°00′00″
distribution mode of misclosure, Line: 0.000 m
then input the offset. When all Offset: 0.000 m

items are input, press [F4] 0SET PT+ PT- OK


([OK]), and press [PT+] or
[PT-] to display each computed
line to be staked out.
(12) Input PtID of measurement 【Stake Out Angle】
point and prism height, PtID: 21
collimate the prism center, and R.HT: 2.621 m
△Hz : -20°00′00″
press [F1] ([DIST]) to start
△ : -2.082 m
measurement, the program will △ : -0.019 m Ⅰ
compute the stake-out offset DIST RECORD NextPt ↓
values between prism point and
stake-out point. The method to
stake out is referred to the
Program “5.6.2 Polar Stake
Out”.※1)
(13) After finishing staking out 【Stake Out Angle 】
one point, press [F3] ([NextPt]) PtID: 20
Miscls: End Arc
to return to Stake Out Angle [F3] Angle: 0°00′00″
menu. Press [F3]([PT+]) or [F2] Angle: 0.000 m
([PT-]) to start staking out the Offset: 0.000 m

next point.※2). 0SET OK


※1) To return to Reference Arc-Window, press [F3]([BACK]) in Key Page 2.
※2) The method to stake out is referred to “5.6.2 Polar Stake Out” Program.

5.13 ROAD
This program enables you to easily define a line or curve or spiral as a reference for
measurements and stake outs. It supports chainages, as well as incremental stake-outs and offsets.
Before starting road design and stake-out, user should set job, station, and orientation first.
【Roads】

F1 Define HZ Alignment F1
F2 Define VT Alignment F2
F3 Stake Out Roads F3

5.13.1 Define HZ Alignment


Horizontal alignment consists of the following elements: start point, line, curve and spiral.

136

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


To define a horizontal alignment, user should first input the detailed information (Chain, N, E
coordinate) of start point.
【Define HZ AL】 1/1
Type: POINT
Chain.: 100.000 m
X/N : 100.000 m
Y/E : 50.000 m

PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

Serial number and the amount of present horizontal alignment are displayed on the upper
right corner of the screen.
The element of start point consists of the start chainage and E, N coordinate of start point.
Enter these details, and press [F2] ([NEXT]) to display the main inputting approach.
【HZ Alignment Type】

Chain.: 100.000 m
AZ: 0°00′00″

LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT

The screen displays: current chainage, the azimuth angle of the tangent on the chainage, and
the function key of the establishing new line. The system provides four functions: defining line,
curve, spiral, and point.
Select a function key, enter the detailed information of the chainage, the alignment elements
will be created. Press [F2] ([BACK]) to calculate the new chainage and azumith angle
automatically and return to the alignment main menu. Now other line tpye can be defined. Press
[ESC] to quit the present screen and return to the screen of alignment element. Modification on
the element entered previously are available.

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① In Road menu, press [F4] to 【Roads】
enter into Road function. As the
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
method to set job, station and [F4] [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Set Orientation (3)
orientation have been
F4 Start (4)
introduced, they are not to be
introduced here.

【Roads】
② Press [F1] to enter into
F1 Define HZ Alignment
Define HZ Alignment function. [F1] F2 Define VT Alignment
F3 Stake Out Roads

137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Input start 【Define HZ AL 】 1/0
③Input the coordinate of start chainage, and Type: Start Arc
Chain. : ---.--- m
chainage. After finishing one N, E X/N : ---.--- m
item, press [ENT] to move to coordinate Y/E : ---.--- m
the next item. + PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

[ENT]

④ when all items have been 【Define HZ AL】


imput, press [F2] ([NEXT]) to
Save Edit Alignment?
store start point information.
The program displays: “Save [F2]
Edit Alignment?” If yes, press
CANCEL OK
[F4] ([OK]). To re-edit it, press
[F1] ([CANCEL]).
【HZ Alignment Type】

Chain.: 100.000 m
⑤ Enter into Horizontal AZ: 0°00′00″
Alignment main menu.

LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT

Line
When the start point or other line type are defined, user can define line. A line consists of
azimith angle and distance. The distance value can not be negative.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【HZ Alignment Type】

Chain.: 100.000 m
①Press [F1] ([LINE]) to enter [F1] AZ : 0°00′00″
into HZ Alignment Type menu.
LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT

Input AZ 【Define HZ AL 】 2/1


Type: ARC
② After inputting AZ angle, +
AZ: ---°---′---″
press [ENT] to go to next input [ENT], Length: ---.--- m
item. After inputting the length Input length
of the line, press [ENT]. +
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
[ENT]]

③ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define HZ AL】


program displays “Save Edit
Alignment?” If yes, press [F2] Save Edit Alignment?
[F4]([OK]). To re-edit it, press
[F1]([CANCEL]).

CANCEL OK

138

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


④ Press [F4] to store this 【HZ Alignment Type】
alignment and return to
Chain : 131.000 m
alignment main menu, and AZ: 25°00′00″
displays chainage of the line,
end point and azimuth of this
LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT
point.
·Now, user can define other
curves.
·When the line is in the middle
of road, the azimuth angle of
the line is calculated according
to the previous elements. If user
is to change this azimuth angle,
the new azimth angle can be
input manually.

Curve

Press [ARC] in “Hz Alignment type” menu to define the curve. A curve consists of arc length
and radius. The rule of radius value: along the forward direction of the curve. When the curve
turns right, the radius value is positive, while the curve turns to left, the radius value is minus. The
arc length can not be negative.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【HZ Alignment Type】
①Press [F2] ([ARC]) to enter
Chain.: 100.000 m
into Define Arc Screen [F2] AZ: 0°00′00″
function.

LINE ARC SPIRAL PT

Input radius 【Define HZ AL】 2/1


②Input radius and arc length, and arc Type: ARC
Radius : ---.--- m
then press [ENT] to record this length ArcLen: ---.--- m
data. +
[ENT] PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define HZ AL】
program displays “Save Edit
Alignment?” If yes, press [F2] Save Edit Alignment?
[F4]([OK]). To re-edit it, press
[F1]([CANCEL]).
CANCEL OK
④ Press [F4] to store this 【HZ Alignment Type】
alignment and return to
Chain.: 151.000 m
alignment main menu, and AZ : 68°20′14″
displays chainage of end point
of the curve and azimuth of this
LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT
point.

Spiral

Press [SPRIAL] in “HZ Alignment Type” menu to define sprial. A sprial consists of the
minimum radius and arc length. The rule of radius value: along the forward direction of the curve.
When the curve turns right, the radius value is positive. When the curve turns to left, the radius
value is minus. The arc length can not be negative.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【HZ Alignment Type】
①Press SPRIAL key in the HZ
Chain. : 100.000 m
Alignment Type menu to define [F3] AZ: 0°00′00″
spiral.
LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT

Input the 【Define HZ AL】 2/1


②Enter the radius and arc radius and Type: SPIRAL
Radius: ---.--- m
length of the spiral. Press arc length of ArcLen: ---.--- m
[ENT] to record the data. sprial
+
[ENT] PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

140

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define HZ AL】
program displays “Save Edit
Alignment?” If yes, press [F2] Save Edit Alignment ?
[F4]([OK]). To re-edit it, press
[F1]([CANCEL]).

CANCEL OK

④ Press [F4] to store this 【HZ Alignment Type】


alignment and return to
Chain.: 111.000 m
alignment main menu, and AZ: 80°20′14″
displays chainage of end point
of the spiral and azimuth of this LINE ARC SPRIAL POINT
point.

Point

Press [POINT] in “HZ Alignment Type” menu to define point. A point element consists of
coordinate, radius and spiral factors A1 and A2. Radius, A1 and A2 can not be negative. As radius
is entered, an arc with specified radius inserted between current point and next point. As spiral
factors A1 or A2 is entered, a curve with specified length is inserted between line and arc.
[NOTE]: If user input A1, A2 from according to the lengths L1, L2 of spiral, the following
fomulas are used to calculate A1 and A2.

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY


【HZ Alignment Type】
①Press SPRIAL key in the HZ
Chain.: 100.000 m
Alignment Type menu to define [F4] AZ: 0°00′00″
point.

LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT

141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Define HZ AL】 2/1
Input N,E, Type: POINT
X/N : ---.--- m
②Input N,E coordinate, radius radius and Y/E : ---.--- m
and A1,A2,then press [ENT]. and A1, A2 Radius: ---.--- m
+ A1 : ---.--- m
A2 : ---.--- m
[ENT]
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
③ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define HZ AL 】
program displays “Save Edit
Alignment?” If yes, press [F2] Save Edit Alignment?
[F4]([OK]). To re-edit it, press
[F1]([CANCEL]). CANCEL OK

【HZ Alignment Tpye】


④ Press [F4] to store this
Chain.: 151.000 m
alignment and return to AZ: 124°20′14″
alignment main menu,

LINE ARC SPIRAL POINT

5.13.2 Editing Horizontal Alignment Data


In the process of defining horizontal alignment, editing is available.
【Define HZ AL】 2/1
Tpye: POINT
X/N : 100.000 m
Y/E : 100.000 m
Radius: 20.000 m
A1 : 80.000 m
A2 : 80.000 m
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
START LAST DELETE ↓
LIST ∣←

Soft Keys:
PREV [F1]: Displays the previous point data.
NEXT [F2]: Displays the next point data.
If the present data is at the end of horizontal alignment, press [NEXT] to return to the
alignment main screen, and it means to add a new alignment data.

SEARCH [F3]: Searches for data. When pressing this key, the program will require user to
insert a chainage. Then press [ENT], and the data of the chainage will be
displayed.
PAGE [F4]: Goes to next page (Page 2).
START [F1]:Goes to the beginning of the file, and displays the first alignment data.
LAST [F2]:Goes to the end of the file, and displays the last alignment data.
LIST [F1]: Displays all the known points and measuredt data in this job in list. This
function can be applied only when the point element of horizontal alignment data is able to be

142

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


input (or edited).

It is possible to edit data by using the function keys above. After entering the data to be edited,
press [ENT] to record the edited data and enter into the inputting screen of next point. To quit
without saving data, press [ESC].
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

【Define HZ AL】 16/16


Tpye: POINT
① Use soft keypad below the [F1] X/N : 100.000 m
Y/E : 100.000 m
screen, press [PREV] or or[F2]
Radius: 20.000 m
[NEXT] to find out the A1 : 80.000 m
alignment data needed to edit. A2 : 80.000 m
User may also press PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

[SEARCH] to search for the [F3] START LAST DELETE ↓

data needed to edit. In “Find + LIST ∣←

HZ Alignment” dialog, input Input chain


[SEARCH] :
the chainage of alignment data
needed to edit, and press
[ENT].

【Define HZ AL】 2/16


Input new Type: LINE
Chain.: 151.000 m
② Input new data, and press data AZ: 68°20′14″
[ENT]. +
[ENT]
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
③ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define HZ AL】
procedure displays “Save Edit
Alignment?”. If yes, press [F4] [F2] Save Edit Alignment?
([OK]); To re-edit it, press
[F1] ([CANCEL]). CANCEL OK
【Define HZ AL】 3/16
Type: SPIRAL
Radius: 22.000 m
④Screen displays next data. ArcLen: 12.000 m

PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

5.13.3 Deleting Horizontal Alignment Data


The horizontal alignment data in internal memory can be deleted. Operation is shown below.

143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Define HZ AL】 16/16
Type: POINT
X/N : 100.000 m
①Use soft keypad below the [F4] Y/E : 100.000 m
screen to display Page 2 of the Radius: 20.000 m
menu. A1 : 80.000 m
A2 : 80.000 m
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
START LAST DELETE ∣←
【Define HZ AL】
② Press [F3] ([DELET]), the
program displays as the graph [F3] Delete All HZ Alignment?
shown on the right.

CANCEL OK

③ Press [F4] to delete 【Define HZ AL】 1/1


Type: Start Arc
horizontal alignment data, all
Chain. : ---.--- m
the horrizontal alignment data X/N : ---.--- m
in internal memory will be Y/E : ---.--- m

deleted. The system returns to


program of Define HZ
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
Alignment. User may re-define
horizontal alignment data.
(Here, taking deleting
horizontal alignment data for
example)
Press [F1] ([CANCEL]) if it is
not to be deleted.

5.13.4 Defining Vertical Alignment


A vertical alignment consists of a series of intersections, including a chainage, height and
curve length. The length of start point and end point must be zero.

Chainage 1000 1300 1800 2300


Height 50 70 60 90
Curve length 0 300 300 0
Intersections can be entered in any order. After entering one point data, press [ENT] to save it

144

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


and go to next inputting screen. Press [ESC] to quit without saving.

OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
①In Road menu, press [F4] to 【Roads】
enter into Road menu. As the
[ * ] F1 Setting Job (1)
method to set job, station and [F4] [ * ] F2 Setting Station (2)
[ * ] F3 Set Orientation (3)
orientation have been
F4 Star (4)
introduced, they are not to be
introduced here.

【Roads】

F1 Define HZ Alignment
② Press [F2] to enter into [F2] F2 Define VT Alignment
F3 Stake Out Roads
Define VT Alignment function.

【Define VT AL】 1/0


③ Input chainage, height and
Chain.: 100.000 m
curve length, and press [ENT]. H/Z: 12.000 m
The curve length of start point Length: 0.000 m
and end point must be zero.

PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓


④ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define VT AL】
procedure displays “Save Edit
Alignment?”. If yes, press [F4] [F2] Save Edit Alignment?
([OK]); To re-edit it, press
[F1] ([CANCEL]).

CANCEL OK
【Define VT AL】 2/1
⑤ Press [F4] to store this
Chain.: ---.--- m
alignment data, and returns to H/Z: ---.--- m
Define VT Alignment main Length: ---.--- m
menu. Proceed to input next
alignment data.
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

5.13.5 Editting Vertical Alignment Data


It is able to be applied to edit vertical alignment data. The OPERATIONAL STEPS is similar
to that of editting horizontal alignment.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


①Use soft keypad below the 【Define VT AL】 16/16
screen, press [PREV] or
Chain. : 100.000 m
[NEXT] to find out the [F1] H/Z : 100.000 m
alignment data needed to edit. or[F2] Length: 0.000 m

PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓


User may also press [F3] START LAST DELETE ∣←
[SEARCH] to search for the + [SEARCH]:

data needed to edit. In “Find Input chain


【Search VT Alignment】
VT Alignment” dialog, input
the chainage of alignment data Chain. : ---.--- m

needed to edit, and press


[ENT].
OK

【Define VT AL】 2/2


Input new
Chain. : 150.000 m
② Input new data, and press data H/Z : 25.010 m
[ENH]. + Length 20.000 m

[ENT]
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

③ Press [F2] ([NEXT]), the 【Define VT AL】


procedure displays “Save Edit
Alignment?”. If yes, press [F4] [F2] Save Edit Alignment?
([OK]); To re-edit it, press
[F1] ([CANCEL]).

CANCEL OK
【Define VT AL】 2/2

Chain. : 280.000 m
④Screen displays next data. H/Z: 15.010 m
Length: 10.000 m

PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

5.13.6 Deleting Vertical Alignment Data


The vertical alignment data in internal memory can be deleted. Operation is shown below.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Define VT AL】 16/16

Chain. : 500.000 m
①Use soft keypad below the [F4] H/Z : 25.010 m
screen to display Page 2 of the Length : 0.000 m

menu.
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓

START LAST DELETE ∣←


【Define VT AL】
② Press [F3] ([DELET]), the
program displays as the graph [F3] Delete All VT AL?
shown on the right.

CANCEL OK

③ Press [F4] to delete 【Define VT AL】 1/0


horizontal alignment data, all
Chain.: ---.--- m
the horrizontal alignment data H/Z: ---.--- m
in internal memory will be Length: ---.--- m
deleted. The system returns to
program of Define HZ
PREV NEXT SEARCH ↓
Alignment. User may re-define
horizontal alignment data.
(Here, taking deleting
horizontal alignment data for
example)
Press [F1] ([CANCEL]) if it is
not to be deleted.

5.13.7 Road Stake-Out


To stake out alignment, the alignment type should be defined first. 2 methods to define
horizontal alignment are available: installing in the computer via the data communication software
provided by Sanding Opti-Electric Co., Ltd; or inputting manually in program “Road”.
The vertical alignment data is unnecessarilly to be defined, unless it is required to compute
dig and fill. The method to define is similar to that of horizontal alignment.

Rules of alignment stake-out data:


Offset left: Horizontal distance between the left chainage and central line.
right: Horizontal distance between the right chainage and central line.
Vertical Difference Left (right): vertical difference between left (right) chainage and the
central line point.

147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


In the process of stake-out, user should first stake out points on the central line, then the
featured points on both sides.

The method to stake out alignment is similar to that of point stake-out, with 3 methods available:

STAKE-OUT OFFSET MEANING DIPLAY


METHOD
△Hz (Angle Offset): positive 【Alignment S-O】 1/3 ▼
when stake-out point is on the PtID: C100+0.0
Polar right of the present R.Ht: 2.000 m
△Hz : -61°59′32″
Stake-out measurement point.
△ : 127.369 m
△ (Distance Offset) : △ : ---.--- m Ⅰ
Positive when stake-out point
All DIST RECORD ↓
is further away.
△ (Height Offset) :
Positive when stake-out point
is higher.
△ LOff (Longitude Offset): 【Alignment S-O】 2/3
Positive when stake-out point PtID: C100+0.0
Orthogonal is further away. R.Ht: 2.000 m
△LOff: 58.592 m
Stake-Out △ Toff (Latitude offset):
△TOff: -114.270 m
intercrosses the line of sight. △H : ---.--- m Ⅰ
positive when stake-out point
All DIST RECORD ↓
is on the right of the present
measurement point.

148

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


△X/△E: X coordinate offset 【Alignment S-O】3/3 ▲
between stake-out point and PtID: C100+0.0
Coordinate the present measurement R.Ht: 2.000 m
△Y/E : 89.212 m
Offset point.
△X/N : 92.369 m
Stake-Out △Y/△N:Y coordinate offset △H : ---.--- m Ⅰ
between stake-out point and
All DIST RECORD ↓
the present measurement
point.

Press [PAGE] to switch among the three stake-out mode.

Here, take Polar Stake-Out for example to introduce the OPERATIONAL STEPS of
alignment stake-out in detail. For more information about other methods of stake-out, please refer
to “5.6 STAKE OUT”.

OPERATIONAL STEPS: (Take points on the central line for example.)


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Roads】
① Set job, station and
[*] F1 Setting Job (1)
orientation first, then in Road [F4] [*] F2 Setting Station (2)
[*] F3 Set Orientation (3)
menu, press [F4] to enter into
F4 Start (4)
Road function.

②Define horizontal alignment 【Roads】


and vertical alignment (as
F1 Define HZ Alignment
required to compute fill/dig). F2 Define VT Alignment
F3 Stake Out Roads
Press [F3] to start Stake Out
Road program.

③ Displays the alignment 【Alignment S-O】


stake-out data. Input start StartC: 100.000 m
Incre. : 1.000 m
chainage, chainage increment, Offs_L: 1.000 m
and the horizontal distance Offs_R: 2.000 m
between side chainage point HtDi.L: 1.000 m
HtDi.R: 1.000 m
and central line. Height OK
distance is required if fill/dig
data is to be staked out.
Offs_L : Horzontal distance
between the left chainage point
and central line.
Offs_R : Horzontal distance
between the right chainage

149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


point and central line.
HtDi.L : Height difference
between the left chainage point
and central line
HtDi.R : Height difference
between the right chainage
point and central line.
④After the data is input, press 【Alignment S-O】
[F4] ([OK]) to enter into the
Chain.: 100.000 m
main screen of displaying Offset: 0.000 m
stake-out point and offset. (See [F4] HtDiff: 0.000 m
R.HT: 1.598 m
the introduction to Stake-Out
Main Menu behind.) STAKE L_OFFS R_OFFS ↓
Here shows the stake-out data SLOPE +CHAIN -CHAIN ∣←
of central line of start chainage.
⑤Here regulates:stake out 【Alignment S-O】
points on the central line first,
PtID: 100.000 m
then press [F2] (or [F3]) to Offset: 0.000 m
stake out the left(or right) HtDiff: 0.000 m
R.HT: 1.598 m
chainage.
Press [L_OFFS](or R_OFFS]), STAKE L_OFFS R_OFFS ↓
the relative chainage, offset, SLOPE +CHAIN -CHAIN ∣←
height difference will be
displayed on the screen.
Chainage and height difference
can be input manually here.
Offset is negative:offset point
is on the left of central line.
Offset is positive:offset point is
on the right of central line.
⑥ When the chainage and the 【 Alignment S-O 】 1/3
offset to be staked out occurs, ▼
PtID: C100+0.0
press [F1]([STAKE]) to enter
R.HT: 2.000 m
into stake-out screen. Input △ Hz : -85°51′32″
prism height and start staking
out. The OPERATIONAL △ : -25.369 m
△ : ---.--- m Ⅰ
STEPS is similar to that of
Point Stake Out. All DIST RECORD ↓
VIEW EDM NEX ∣←

150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑦Collimate the current prism, 【 Alignment S-O 】 1/3
press [F2] ([DIST]) to start ▼
PtID C100+0.0
measurement, and calculate and [F2]
R.HT 2.000 m
display the stake-out factor △Hz : -85°51′32″
offsets of between target point △ : -25.369 m
and stake-out point. △ : 2.364 m Ⅰ

All DIST VIEW ↓


⑧Rotate the telescope until △ 【 Alignment S-O 】 1/3
Hz shows an angle offset of ▼
PtID: C100+0.0
0°00′00″, and order the
R.HT: 2.000 m
surveyor to move the prism. △Hz : 00°00′00″
·Arrowhead’s meanings: △ : -15.369 m
:From measurement station, △ : 2.364 m Ⅰ
move the prism leftward.
All DIST RECORD ↓
:From measurement station,
move the prism rightward.
⑨Set prism on zero direction 【Alignment S-O】1/3 ▼
based on the telescope and PtID: C100+0.0
collimate it, press [F2] R.HT: 2.000 m
△Hz : 00°00′00″
([DIST]) to start measurement [F2]
△ : -10.369 m
and calculate the stake-out △ : 2.364 m Ⅰ
factor offset between prism
All DIST RECORD ↓
point and stake-out point.
Arrowhead direction is the
direction the prism is to moved.
⑩Move the prism forward or 【Alignment S-O】1/3 ▼
backward according to PtID: C100+0.0
R.HT: 2.000 m
arrowhead untill △
△Hz : 00°00′00″
shows a distance value of 0 m.
△ : 0.000 m
·Arrowhead’s meanings: △ : 2.364 m Ⅰ
:To move the prism toward to
All DIST RECORD ↓
the measurement station.
:To move prism further away
from the direction of
measurement station.
In the process of stake-out, if
fine (r) or tracking
measurement mode is selected,
the facotr offset of between
prism point and stake-out point
can be displayed at real time,
which is of great convenience.

151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


(11) As both △Hz and △ 【Alignment S-O】1/3 ▼
reads 0, it means that the PtID: C100+0.0
current prism point is the R.HT: 2.000 m
△Hz : 00°00′00″
stake-out point. △ shows
△ : 0.000 m
the data of fill/cut. △ : 2.364 m Ⅰ
:means it needs to dig. The
All DIST RECORD ↓
value is the depth to dig.
:means it needs to fill. The
value is height to fill.
(12) After one point is staked 【Alignment S-O】
out, press [F4] to display Page
Chain.: 100.000 m
2 of soft keys. Press [F3] Offset: 0.000 m
([NextPt]) to enter the inputting HtDiff: 0.000 m
R.HT: 1.598 m
screen of next chainage data;
Repeat Procedure ⑥~(11) , to STAKE L_OFFS R_OFFS ↓
stake out each featured point.

Explanation for the Alignment Stake-Out screen:


【Alignment S-O】

Chain.: 100.000 m
Offset : 0.000 m
HtDiff: 0.000 m
R.HT: 1.598 m

STAKE L_OFFS R_OFFS ↓


SLOPE +CHAIN -CHAIN ∣←

L_OFFS: This key is used to stake out left chainage. Press it to display the offset and the
height difference of the left chainage.
R_OFFS: This key is used to stake out right chainage. Press it to display the offset and the
height difference of the right chainage.
+CHAIN: The key is used to increase the chainage.
-CHAIN: The key is used to discrease the chainage.
SLOPE: The key is used to stake out slope.
Screen of Stake Out Function
【AlignmentS-O】1/3 ▼
PtID: C100+0.0
R.HT: 2.000 m
△Hz : 20°00′05″
△ : 25.369 m
△ : ---.--- m Ⅰ

All DIST RECORD ↓


VIEW EDM NEX ∣←

152

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Explanation for Point ID:
The number behind C is the chainage.
+ means to stake out points of the right chainage. While staking out points of the left
chainage, it shows “-”.
+(or-) behind the number is the distance between points of right chainage and central line, i.e.
the data of the right offset(or left offset)data. Here, the points on the central line reads 0.0.
For instance: PtID C100+2.0 expresss the point on the right chainage is 2 m away from the
central line, with a chainage of 100.
5.13.8 Slope Stake Out
Slope Stake Out can be launched as part of the Alignment Stake-Out. It is a must to define
horizontal and vertical alignments in Road menu previsouly. In stake-out main screen, press [F1]
([SLOPE]) to display Slope Stake Out.
Main Screen of Slope Stake Out
【Slope Stake Out】
Left(1:n)
Cut : 1.350
Fill : 1.000
Right(1: n)
Cut : 1.200
Fill : 1.650
LEFT RIGHT

Indeed, the fill/ cut value that are input here is a ratio.

The fill/dig data can be entered through left and right slopes. In terms of fill/dig, use positive
symbol to input the required slope, the software selects an appropriate slope in the list according
to the actual position of the point.
Dig/fill is decided via the estimated height of hinge point. If the height is above the hinge
point, the dig slope is used, otherwise the fill slope is used.

153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Alignment S-O】
① Input (or select) the side
Chain.: 100.000 m
chainage to be slope staked out. [F4] Offset : 0.000 m
Press [F4] ([↓]) to turn to Key [F1] HtDiff: 0.000 m
R.HT: 1.598 m
Page 2, and press [F1]
([SLOPE]) to start slope STAKE L_OFFS R_OFFS ↓
stake-out . SLOPE +CHAIN -CHAIN ∣←

② Input the ratio of left and 【Slope Stake Out】


right slopes to be filled (or (1:n)LEFT
Cut : 1.350
digged). After finishing Fill : 1.000
inputting one item, press (1: n)RIGHR
Cut : 1.200
[ENT]. When all data are
Fill : 1.650
imput, select the left (or right) LEFT RIGHT
slope to be staked out.
③ Enter into the screen of 【Slope Stake Out】
Slope Stake Out function, input PtID: C100+10.0S
prism height, collimate the R.HT: 2.000 m
△LOff : ---.--- m
point that is to be intercepted [F2]
△TOff : ---.--- m
near the slope, and press [F2]
([DIST]) to start slope Ⅰ
All DIST RECORD ↓
stake-out. The system will
select an approriate slope from
the data input in last procedure.
Suppose to set the height of
measurement point as the
horizontal datum plane,
calculate the intercepted point.
The list displays the offset
between measurement point
and calculated point. The
mothod to stake out slope is

154

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


similar to that of point
stake-out. When both △ L-Off
△ T_Off are zero, it indicates
that the stake-out point is
found.
④ After finishing staking out 【Slope Stake Out】
Left(1:n)
this point, press [ESC] to return
Cut: 1.350
to the main screen of Slope Fill: 1.000
Stake Out, input other slope to Right(1: n)
Cut: 1.200
be staked out to proceed the
Fill : 1.650
stake-out of next slope via the LEFT RIGHT
same approach.
Note:
1) If the earth surface crosses the hinge point, the intersection cannot be calculated.
2) As the fill/dig value of calculated point is zero, therefore the fill/dig value is not displayed.

5.14 CONSTRUCTION SITE STAKE OUT


This application allows to define a construction site by combining set-up of the instrument
along a construction line, measuring and stake-out points related to the line.
After activating the application, you have 2 options:
a) New constraction site
b) Continue with previous site (skips set-up)
5.14.1 Defining New Construction Site
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Programs】 3/3 ▲
① In Prgram Page 3/3, press
F1 Roads (9)
[F2] to enter into Construction [F2] F2 Construction (0)
function.

②Set Job 【Setting Job】 2/3


[F1]:Add a job
Job : A
[F4]:Set the file selected by the Name: --- --- ---
navigation key as the current Date: 2006.08.21
Time : 16:50:28
job.
ADD OK
③ Displays the menu of 【Construction 】
Construction.
F1 Setting Job
To re-set a new job, press [F1]. F2 EDM Setting
F3 Defining new Site
To set EDM, press [F2]. [F3]
F4 Skips set-up
To set a new site, press [F3].
To adopt the site set previsouly,
press [F4].

155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Here, take setting a new
construction site for example:
press [F3].
【Defining new Site】
④ Input the Start PtID of Input start Sight Meas Start Pt!
StartP: 1
construction site and prism PtID of site
height, collimate the prism + R.HT: 2.000 m
center, press [F2] ([DIST]) + [F2] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
[F3] ([RECORD]) to start + : ---.--- m
All DIST RECORD ↓
measurement. ※1) [F3]
EDM ENH ∣←
Input end 【Defining new Site】
⑤Input end PtID of end site PtID Sight Meas End Pt!
StartP: 1
and prism height, collimate the +
End Pt: 2
prism center, and press [F2] R.HT: 1.500 m
[F2]([DIST]) + [F3] + : ---.--- m Ⅰ
([RECORD]) to measure the [F3] : ---.--- m
end point of construction site. All DIST RECORD ↓

【Stake Out 】
PtID:
--- ---
⑥After setting the site, enter R.HT: 1.500 m
into Stake Out menu. Ln: ---.--- m
Of: ---.--- m
H: ---.--- m
All DIST CHECK ↓
DIST RECORD SHIFTl ∣←

Set Construction Site via Known Point


If the point to be measured here is known point and X,Y coordinates have been input, the program will
display the length calculated, the practical length measured, and the dialog of offset value.
OPERATIONAL STEPS AS FOLLOWS :
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Defing new Site】
① Enter setting new line Input start Sight Meas Start Pt!
StartP: 1
function.Entry dialog box of PtID of site
defining start point,press[F4] + End P: 2.000 m
display the second page soft [F2] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
key. + : ---.--- m
All DIST RECORD ↓
[F3]
EDM ENH ∣←

156

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


②Press [F2] ([ENH]) to enter A:
into dialog of coordinate 【Coordinate Input 】

inputting. PtID: 1
A: Y/E : ---.--- m
X/N : ---.--- m
Imput directly the known point
H : ---.--- m
name and E,N,H coordinate,
this operation will not store the SEARCH LIST OK

known points being imputted to


job. B:
【Pt Search】 1/25
2 Known
B: A1 Meas.
Through pressing [F1] A12 Meas.
A12 Meas.
([VIEW]) or [F2] ([LIST]) in A12 Meas.
Graph A to call up known A12 Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB OK
points in job.
C:

C:
If the point does not exist, input
coordinate in the dialog shown
in Graphic C and save it in job.

【Defing new Site】


③After the start point of site Sight Meas Start Pt!
StartP: 1
has been decided, input prism [F2]
height, collimate the prism + End P: 2.000 m
center, press [F2]([DIST])+ [F3] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
[F3] ([RECORD]) to start : ---.--- m
All DIST RECORD ↓
measurement.
EDM ENH ∣←
④ Following Procedure ② to 【Defining new Site】
determine the end point of site, Sight Meas End Pt!
StartP: 1
and input the prism height, [F2]
End Pt: 2
and press [F2] ([DIST]) + [F3] + R.HT: 1.500 m
([RECORD]) to start [F3] : ---.--- m Ⅰ
measurement. : ---.--- m
All DIST RECORD ↓
⑤To display the result screen. 【Construction Check】
[F1] : Reject the result, and
Known Length: 12.635 m
rebuild the site. Meas. Length: 12.640 m
[F4]:Accept the result to set Offset: -0.005 m
the line and enter into stake out REFUSE DIST RECORD OK
screen.

157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5.14.2 Shifting Line
[ShiftL]: Input horizontal shifting value to horizontally shift the line.
The line can be horizontally shifted according to the requirement of job.
OPERATIONAL STEPS:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【AS-BuiltCheck】
PtID: 3
R.H: 1.500 m
① To horizontally shift the [F4] Ln: ---.--- m
line, press [F4] ([ ↓ ]), and [F3] Of: ---.--- m
press [F3] ([ShiftL]). H: ---.--- m
All DIST STAKE ↓
DIST RECORD ShiftL ∣←
② Input the shiftiing value to Input shifting 【Shift the Line】
Defining new Site!
shift the line. After inputting value
one item, press [ENT] to move + R_Shift: 0.000 m
to next item. After finishing [ENT] F_Shift: 0.000 m
Up_Shift: 0.000 m
inputting all items, press [F4] +
([OK]). [F4] 0SET REVERS OK
To set all shifting value to zero,
press [0SET] to reverse the site
and press [REVERS].
【AS-BuiltCheck】
PtID: 5
R.HT: 1.500 m
③ Proceed the measurement Ln:﹉﹉. ﹉ m
of other points in the same Of: ﹉. ﹉﹉ m
H: ﹉. ﹉﹉ m
approach.
All DIST STAKE ↓

DIST RECORD SHIFTL ∣←

5.14.3 As Build Check


This function shows you the line difference, offset, and the height difference of a measured point
in relation to the line.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【AS-BuiltCheck】
PtID: 3
Input PtID,
R.HT: 1.500 m
①Input PtID to be measured R.Ht Ln: ---.--- m
and prism height. + Of: ---.--- m
H: ---.--- m
[ENT]
All DIST STAKE ↓

DIST RECORD ShiftL ∣←

158

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


②Collimate the prism center, 【AS-BuiltCheck】
press [F2] ([DIST]) to start PtID: 3
R.HT : 1.500
measurement, the screen will m
display longitude, latitude and [F2] Ln : 2.259 m
Of: -0.257 m
the height difference between
H: 1.305 m
the target point and line.
Meanwhile, the graphic on the
right of the screen displays the
relation among the prism, All DIST STAKE ↓
DIST RECORD ShiftL ∣←
station and the line.
【AS-BuiltCheck】
PtID: --- ---
R.HT : 1.500
③Proceed the measurement of m
other points in the same Ln : ---.--- m
Of: ---.--- m
approach.
H: ---.--- m

All DIST STAKE ↓


DIST RECORD ShiftL ∣←
Information shown in AS-Builtcheck is introduced follow:
Longitude (in direction of the line) is positive: expresses the point measured lies between the start
point and end point of the line.
Right latitude offset is positive: expresses the point measured is on the right of the line.
H is positive: expresses the point measured is higher than the start point of the line.

The height of start point of the line is always set as the reference height .

Soft Keys:
[F3]( [STAKE]): The program switches to Stake Out function .
[F3]([ShiftL]): Input a shift value to shift the line horizontally.

5.14.4 Stake Out


Here you can search of enter points to be staked out related to the measured line.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Stake Out】
PtID: --- ---
R.HT: 1.500 m
① In 【AS-BuiltCheck】menu, Ln: ---.--- ---.--- m
press [F3] ([STAKE]) to enter m ---°---′---″
Of: ---.--- m ---.--- m
into Stake Out function.※1)
H: --- --- m

All DIST STAKE ↓


DIST RECORD SHIFTL ∣←

159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② Input the PtID of the point Input PtID & A:
to be staked out and press prism height 【Stake Out 】
PtID :
[ENT]. Move on to next item + 3
and input prism height. [ENT] R.HT: 1.500
﹉﹉.﹉﹉m
m
A:If the PtID exists in the job, ﹉°﹉′﹉″
Ln: 1.971
﹉﹉.﹉﹉m
it displays the relation between m
Ln: 0.058 m
this point and the line.
H: 2.128 m

B: If there are several data with


All DIST STAKE ↓
the same PtID, it displays the
B:
dialog of PtiID being found. 【Pt Search 】 1/25
User can select by pressing 12
Known
12
. Meas.
12
Meas.
12
Meas.
C:If the point does not exist, 12
user is required to input the Meas.
12
coordinate. Meas.
VIEW ENH JOB OK
C:
【Pt Search】

Job: SANDG
PtID: 56

Select job/input Pt coord

SEARCH 0SET ENH OK

③ Collimate the prism 【Stake Out 】


center, press [F2] ([DIST]) to PtID: 3
R.HT : 1.500 m
start measurement, the screen Ln: 1.971 1.967 m
will display longitude, latitude [F2] m 0.023 m
Of: 0.058 m 2.369 m
and height difference between
H: 2.128
target point and the line. The m
upper right graphic displays the All DIST CHECK ↓

relation between prism point


and stake-out point. Lower
right displays an precise offset
value and offset direction with
a arrowhead.

160

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


④ Move the prism according 【Stake Out 】
to the graphic. When PtID: 3
R.HT: 1.500 m
bothlongitude and latitue Ln: 1.971 0.000m
arrowhead display zero, it m 0.000 m
Of: 0.058 m 0.369 m
means the stake-out point has
H: 2.128
been found; H means the m
filling. Method to stake our is
the same to “5.6 Stake Out”.※ All DIST CHECK ↓
2)
※1) To shift the line horizontally, press [F3] ([ShiftL]).
※2) Longitude offset direction is positive (Arrowhead upwards):Target point is further away
from measurement point.
Latitude offset is positive (Arrowhead rightwards): Target point is on the right of measrement
point
H is positive (Arrowhead upwards): Target point is higher than measurement point.

The height of the line start point is always used as the refernce height.
The graphics are scaled to give a better overview. Therefore it’s possible that the station point
moves in the graphic.
Be aware that the line start point and the line end point are measured in the previous
coordinate system. When staking our this points they appear in the old system and appear as
shifted.
During the operation the the application, the previou Orientation and Station parameters will
be the new calculated ones.

161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


6、FILE MANAGEMENT
File management including all the functions of inputting ,editing and examining data in the
field.
【File Management 】 1/2 ▼

F1 Job (1)
F2 Known points (2)
F3 Measurements (3)
F4 Code (4)

F1 F2 F3 F4

【File Management T 】2/2 ▲

F1 Initialize Memory (5)


F2 Memory Statistic (6)

F1 F2 F3 F4

6.1 JOB
All measurement data is stored in selected job, such as: the known points, measurement
points coding and results, etc.
This function can launch new establishment, selection, deletion of a job
The definition of job includes input of job name and operators.

6.1.11 SELECTING JOB


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【File Management】1/2 ▼
① Inside File Management
F1 Job (1)
menu, press [F1] to enter into [F1] F2 Known (2)
F3 Measurement (3)
Job function.
F4 Code (4)

F1 F2 F3 F4

② The Screen displays the 【View Job】 1/17


name and other information of Job: A
Name: --- --- ---
the current job. Date: 2006.08.21
The upper right corner of the Time : 16:50:28
screen displays the sequence Note 1: --- --- ---
Note 2: --- --- ---
number of present job and the DELETE ADD OK
amount of jobs in internal
memory. Page 1/17 shown in
the right graph indicates the
first data in a total amount of
17 data.

162

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【View Job】 1/17
③By Pressing navigation key Job: SANDING
Name: --- --- ---
to turn page forward or Date: 2006.08.21
backward to view the jobs in time : 16:50:28:
internal memory Note 1: --- --- ---
Note 2: --- --- ---
DELETE ADD OK

④As the required file name 【View Job】 1/17


appears, press [F4], the Job: SANDING
Name : --- --- ---
program prompts “Job set Date: 2006.08.21
already!” Then this file is Time : 16:50:28
opened and set as the present Note 1: --- --- ---
Note 2: --- --- ---
job. The measurement data DELETE ADD OK
since then are stored in this file.

6.1.2 ESTABLISHING NEW JOB


There are 16 characters in a job. They may be letters of A-Z, or numbers of 0-9 and_, #, $, @,
%, +, -, etc. But the first character should not be spaced.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【View Job】 1/17
① In Job menu, press [F3] Job : A
Name: --- --- ---
([ADD]) to add a new job. Date: 2006.08.02
Time : 16:10:20
Note 1: --- --- ---
Note 2: --- --- ---
DELETE ADD OK
③ Open inputting mode by 【New Job】
pressing numeric keypad, input Job: ﹉﹉﹉
Name: ﹉﹉﹉
the name of job to be Date: 2006.08.21
established. To switch between Time : 16:50:28
character and figure inputting Note 1: ﹉﹉﹉
Note 1: ﹉﹉﹉
mode, press [F4]. When VIEW SAVE
displaying AB, it means the
status of character inputting, 【New Job】
Job: SURVEY
while display [01] means the
Name : --- --- ---
status of figure inputting. As Date: 2006.08.21
one item has been finished, Time : 16:50:28
Note 1: --- --- ---
press [ENT] to move to the
Note 2: --- --- ---
next inputing item. To return to AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR NUMBER
last menu to view the job, press
[F1] ([VIEW]).

163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ After finishing inputting, 【View Job】 1/17
press [F4] to store this job and Job: SURVEY
Name : --- --- ---
return to last menu. The job Date: 2006.08.21
established is displayed and set Time : 16:50:28
as the current job. Note 1: --- --- ---
Note 2: --- --- ---
DELETE ADD OK
※1) A maximum of 17 jobs are able to be established.
[JOB]:If the document name of job is input randomly by operator, hereafter the data are stored in
this job.
[NAME]:Name of operator. (can be default)
[NOTE 1 ] and [NOTE 2 ] describe a rough condition of this project. (can be defauft)

The system will automatically add the date and time of establishment.
The newly-established job is defaulted as the present job. If this job name exists, the
procedure will indicate “JOB EXIST!” Therefor, if it is not assured whether the newly-established
job name exists in internal memory, you may view the job names existing in internal memory via
before setting a new job.

6.1.3 DELETING SELLECTED JOB


OPERATIONAL STEP:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【View Job】 1/17
① In Job menu, press Job: ABCC
Name: VIVI
navigation key to select Date: 2006.08.02
the job file you want to delete. Time : 16:10:20
Note 1: --- --- ---
Note 2: --- --- ---
DELETE ADD OK
② Press [F1] ([DELETE]) 【View Job】
below the screen, a dialog
shows as the right graph. To Sure delete job ?
confirm to delete, press [F4]
([OK]). Otherwise, press [F1]
([CANCEL]) to return to last DELETE OK
menu.

6.2 KNOWN POINT


This application allows user to launch operations of searching, editing, and deleting known
point in each job in internal memory. Valid known points conrtain at least the PtID and the
coordinates (E,N) or height (H).

164

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【File Management】1/2 ▼
① In File Management menu,
F1 Job (1)
press [F2] to enter into Known [F2] F2 Known (2)
F3 Measurement (3)
Points function.
F4 Code (4)

F1 F2 F3 F4

【View Known Pt】


② The screen displays the Job : ABCC
Pt ID: 1
known point information in the Y/E : 206.020 m
present job X/N : 161.200 m
H : 92.026 m

SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


③ Use navitation key to 【View Known Pt】
select a certain job in internal Job : SANDING
Pt ID: 1
memory (User also can select Y/E : 100.000 m
all jobs), then press [ENT] to X/N : 100.000 m
move to PtID item. Similarly, H : 90.000 m

press to view all the known SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


points in this job one by one.
※1)
※1) ALL JOB:Display data of all known point data in all jobs in internal memory.

6.2.1 SEARCHING KNOWN POINTS


Input pointIDs or wildcard “*” to search for known points in selected job.
OPERATIONAL STEPS KEY DISPLAY
【View Known Pt 】
Job : SANDING
①Use to select a job (or all
Pt ID: 1
jobs). Press [F1] ([SEARCH]) Y/E : 100.000 m
to start Search function. X/N : 100.000 m
H : 90.000 m
SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT
【SEARCH】
②A dialog appears as the right Job : SANDING
Pt ID: *
graph. Input PtID or wildcard
“*” and press [ENT].
BACK .

③ Displays searching result 【View Known Pt】


dialog. Job: All Job
Pt ID: 1
If a certain known point is to be Y/E : 0.000 m
searched, the coordinate X/N : 0.000 m
information of this point is H : 0.000 m

displayed. SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


If wildcard “*” is input, press

165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


navigation key to display
all the known points in job one
by one.

6.2.2 ADDING KNOWN POINT


A dialog of inputting PtID and coordinate of a new known point is displayed.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【View Known Pt】
Job: DATA
Pt ID: 1
①Use to select the job Y/E : 100.000 m
needed to add data. X/N : 100.000 m
H : 90.000 m

SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


②Press [F3] ([ADD]) to start 【Input Known Pt】
data adding function. The Job : SANDING
Pt ID: --- --- ---
screen displays a dialog showed Y/E : ---.--- m
as the right graph. X/N : ---.--- m
If to re-select a job, press H : ---.--- m
View SAVE
navitation key . If to return
to last menu. Press [F1]
([VIEW]).
③Input PtID and coordinate of 【Input Known Pt 】
the new known point, then Job : SANDING
Pt ID : 1
press [ENT]. After finishing Y/E : 100.000 m
inputting, press [F4] ([SAVE]) X/N : 100.000 m
to finish adding known H : 100.000 m

points, and store after the View SAVE


known points existing in the
file. 【Input Known Pt 】

If the PtID input exists in


internal memory, the program Pt. Exist ! Want to cover the data ?

call up the coordinate of this


point. To store it with the other DELETE OK

PtID, press to move to the


PtID item and re-input the
PtID.
To input new coordinate
without changing PtID, press
[F4] ([SAVE]). The screen
shows as the right graph.
To overwrite the known data,
press [F4] ([OK]). To re-input
PtID, press [F1]([CANCEL]).

166

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


④ After finishing adding a 【Input Known Pt】
known point, the program Job: SANDING
Pt ID: 1
automatically add 1 (+1) to the Y/E : 100.000 m
PtID, and continues to input X/N : 100.000 m
other know points, as shown in H : 100.000 m

the right graph. View SAVE


To quit this program, press
[ESC] to return to last menu.
6.2.3 EDITING THE KNOWN POINTS
This function allows editing known points in internal memory.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【View Known Pt】
Job: DATA
① Use to select the job
Pt ID: 1
which contains the point to be Y/E : 100.000 m
edited. Press [ENT] to move to X/N : 100.000 m
PtID item. H : 90.000 m

SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


【View Known Pt】
Job: SANDING
② Press navigation key
Pt ID: 10
(or use search function) to find Y/E : 110.000 m
out the data needed to edit. X/N : 102.000 m
H : 116.000 m

SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


③Press [F4] ([EDIT]) to start 【Edit Known Pt】
data editing function, and the
Pt ID :
screen displays this point data. 10
Input new PtID, coordinate, and Y/E : 110.000 m
X/N : 102.000 m
press [ENT] to move to the
H : 116.000 m
next line. For those data
Back SAVE
needed no edit, press [ENT]
directly.
④ As input is finished, press 【Input Known Pt】
[F4] to save the edited data.
The screen displays as the right Pt. Exist ! Want to cover the data ?
graph. Press [F4] ([OK]) to
store the edited data.
DELETE OK
To re-edit this point please
press [F1] ([CANCEL]).

167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【View Known Pt】
⑤ After finishing editing one Job: SANDING
Pt ID : 10
data, return to last menu, and
the data edited is displayed. Y/E : 1100.000 m
X/N : 1002.000 m
H : 116.000 m

SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT


6.2.4 DELETING KNOWN POINTS
Deletes the selected known points in internal memory
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① Use to select the job 【View Known Pt 】
that contains the data to be Job: DATA
Pt ID: 1
deleted. Press [ENT] to move Y/E : 100.000 m
to PtID item, by pressing [ENT] X/N : 100.000 m
H : 90.000 m
(or use search function) to
find out the data to be deleted. SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT
②Press [F2] ([DELETE]) to
start deleting data function.
The screen displays a dialog [F2] Delete data? Deleted data NoRevert!
showed as the right graph.
To delete data, press [F4] DELETE OK
([OK]).
If not to delete, press [F1]
([CANCEL]).
【View Known Pt】
Job : DATA
Pt ID: 1
③ The screen returns to last Y/E : 100.000 m
menu. X/N : 100.000 m
H : 90.000 m

SEARCH DELETE ADD EDIT

6.3 MESUREMENT DATA


Measurement data available in internal memory can be searched and displayed. Part of them
can be deleted.
6.3.1 Viewing Measurement Data
Viewing measurement data is based on the unit of measurement station in selected job. User
may view one or all points (“*”) on a measurement station in a certain job; or a certain PtID or all
measurement data of all measurement stations (“*”) in internal memory.

6.3.1.1 Viewing All Measurement Points in Job


Confirm the searching scope first: they may be all points of one measurement station in a
certain job;or all points of all measurement stations(“*”) (i.e. all measurement data in this job).
Here,take viewing all measurement data in job as an example.
OPERATIONAL STEP:

168

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【File Management 】 1/2 ▼
①In File Management menu,
F1 Job (1)
press [F3] to enter point [F3] F2 known points (2)
F3 Search specified Pt (3)
measurement functio.
F4 Code (4)

F1 F2 F3 F4

②Viewing job is defaulted in 【View Measurement】


the system is the present job
Job: SANDING
name. To examine the other Stn.Pt: *
F3 Search specified Pt
measurement data, press F4 View ALL Meas.Value
[ENT]
to move to job item, then press Pt ID View

to select the job to be


examined. The screen displays
as the right graph. After
finishing the setting, press
[ENT] to move to station point
item.
③ The examination scope 【View Measurement】
defaulted in this system is all
Job: SANDING
measurement stations in the job Stn.Pt: *
to be examined (“*” ), as the F3 Search specified Pt
F4 View ALL Meas.Value
right graph shows. Therefore,
to view all measurement data in Pt ID View
job, just press [F4] ([VIEW]).
④The screen displays various 【View】 1
measurement information
Type: Para.Sys.ness
starting with the first data in Date: 2006.08.22
job. “1” on the upper right Time: 14:44:12
corner of screen represents that
this point is the first data in job. FIND
※1)~※3)

169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤ A:Find the other page:
A:
Press [PAGE] to display other EDM Type: IR
pages of this data. EDM Mode: Fine[S]
Prism type: Prism
Prism: -30mm

FIND
B:Find the other data
B:
【View】 2
Press navigation key to Type : Station SYS.MESS
display all data in the job one StnPt : OCC1
by one. INS.Ht : 1.000 m
Date : 2006.08.22
Time : 14:44:52

FIND

⑥ Press [F4] ([SEARCH]) to 【View Measurements】


return to View Measurements
Job: SANDING
main menu. StnPt: *
F3 Search specified Pt
F4 View ALL Meas.Value
To return to File Management
menu, press [ESC]. Pt ID View

※1) The first data of general job documents displays some measurement information,such as:
data of job establishment, type of prism, EDM, etc.
※2) indicates that user can use navigation key to display each data in job.
※3) ▼、 、▲indicates that there are still some other pages of this data, and it may be displayed
by pressing [PAGE].

6.3.1.2 Viewing Designated PtID in Job


Starts searching point. STS-700 Series Total Station provides point search function based
on taking measurement station as searching condition. Determine the searching scope at first: it
may be one PtID of one station in job;or all measurement data named with this PtID (“*”) in job.
Therefore, in operation, user can input complete pointIDs or the pointIDs with wildcard “*”.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
① In View Measurements 【View Measurements】
menu, press navigation key
Job: SANDING
to select the job name StnPt: *
and press [ENT] to move to F3 Search specified Pt
F4 View ALL Meas.Value
the next inputting area.
PtID View

170

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


② All searching conditions A:
are based on the premises of 【View Measurements】

measurement stations. So the Job: SANDING


name of measurement StnPt: OCC1
F3 Search specified Pt
stations input here can be a F4 View ALL Meas.Value
concrete pointID or pointID
PtID View
with wildcard “*”.※1)
A:
The system defaults wildcard
“*”, i.e. all measurement B:
stations. 【View Measurements】

Job: SANDING
B: StnPt: OCC1
F3 Search specified Pt
Input a concrete PtID, and
F4 View ALL Meas.Value
press [ENT].
PtID View

【SEARCH】
③Press [F3] ([PtID]) into the
inputting dialo. [F3] Pt ID: *

BACK .

④Input PtID to be searched. A:


It can be a concrete PtID, or 【SEARCH】

wildcard “*”.
A: Pt ID: *

The system defaults the


wildcard “*”, which means
BACK .
searching scope is all
B:
measurement data in
【SEARCH 】
measurement stations set just
now, press [ENT] to start
Pt ID: 1
searching.
B:
Input a concrete PtID, and
BACK .
press [ENT].

171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑤ Displays searching result A:
which relies on the settings of 【View】 1
Type : Station Measure
job name, measurement StnPt : OCC1
station name and PtID. ※ INS.Ht: 1.000 m
Date: 2006.08.22
2)~※3).
Time: 14:44:52
A: FIND
If the pointIDs that are
B:
qualified to searching
【View Measurements】
conditions have been found,
they will be displayed on the Job: SANDING
StnPt: *
screen according to their
F3 Search specified Pt
saving sequence. Press F4 View ALL Meas.Value
navigation key to
PtID VIEW
view one by one.
B:
If not find the PtID qualified
to searching condiction,just
return to View measurements
main menu.
⑥ Press [F4] ([FIND]) to 【View Measurements】
return to View Measurements Job: SANDING
StnPt: *
menu. F3 Search specified Pt
To return to File Management F4 View ALL Meas.Value

menu, press [ESC]. PtID VIEW

※1)Since both the names of measurement station and PtID can be input a concrete PtID or
wildcard, an explanation on various combined searching result is given here.All the searching
results are based on the premises of a selected searching job name:
Measurement station(concrete PtID) + PtID(concrete PtID) : The searching result is the
measurement data named by this PtID on a certain measurement station. If there’re some more
data, view them by pressing .
Measurement station (“*”)+PtID(concrete PtID):The searching result is all measurement data
named by this PtID on all measurement stations in job. By pressing to view them one by one.
Measurement station(concrete PtID)+PtID(“*”):The searching result is all tactic points on a
certain measurement station. by pressing can view them one by one.
※2) indicates that it can be displayed every data in job via navigation key
※3) ▼, , ▲indicates that this data still have some more pages and can be displayed by
pressing [PAGE].

6.3.2 Deleting Measurement Data


Those invalid or repeated measurement data can be deleted.
Only data of measurement point can be deleted. For those data of measurement station,
orientation, target points of roads and tie distance, etc., can not be deleted.
OPERATIONAL STEP:

172

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【View】 1
Type : Measure Measure
StnPtT: 2008
③ After finding out the [F1] H : 225°52′21″
measurement point data to be V : 96°50′11″
deleted, press [F1] ([DELETE]). Date : 2006.08.22
Time : 14:44:52
DELETE FIND

【SEARCH】 1
TYPE: Result Tie Distance
Pt ID 1: 2008
④The data has been deleted, the Pt ID 2: 2009
screen displays the next data. V 4.3%
△ : 12.769 m
△ : 0.551 m
FIND

6.4 CODING
Here, it can launch those coding functions of newly-establishment, searching, and deleting in
code database.

6.4.1 Manual Code Input


The code in code database can be input manually, or created by the communication software
provided by Sanding Company, and transmitted to the instrument.
Each code have one item of explanation and a maximum of 8 attributes that has no more than
16 characters.
【Code View/Del 】1/2
Code: Nr01
Desc: BOARDLINE
Info1: Nr.12
Info2: 12.54
Info3: --- ---
Info4: --- ---
VIEW SAVE

GSI- CODING
Code:Code name.
Desc: Appended describtion.
Info1:Editable information which includes more contents.
……
Info8:Other information lines.
OPERATIONAL STEP:
OPERATIONAL STEP KEY DISPLAY
【File Management】1/2 ▼
① In File Management menu,
F1 Job (1)
press [F4] to enter into Code [F4] F2 Known Points (2)
F3 Measurements (3)
function menu.
F4 Codes (4)
F1 F2 F3 F4

173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Code View/Del】1/2 ▼
② In Code View/Del dialog, Find: *
Code: 1
press [F1] ([NEW]) to start input [F1] Desc: --- --- ---
Code function. Info1 : --- --- ---
Info2 : --- --- ---
Info3 : --- --- ---
NEW DELETE
【 Input Code】1/2 ▼
③ Input the code and the Code: N01
Desc: TREE
information,etc. as shown on the Info1 : N123
right graph. Info2 : --- --- ---
Info3 : --- --- ---
Info4 : --- --- ---
VIEW SAVE
④ After finishing inputting, 【 Input Code】1/2 ▼
Press [F4] to store code. The Code: --- --- ---
Desc: --- --- ---
procedure allows proceeding to Info1 : --- --- ---
input other codes, the data stored Info2 : --- --- ---
will be added after the code Info3 : --- --- ---
Info4 : --- --- ---
existing in the file. VIEW SAVE
[SAVE] To store data
[VIEW] The searching dialog appears.

6.4.2 Viewing Code


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【File Management】1/2 ▼
①In File management menu,
F1 Job (1)
press [F4] to enter into Code [F4] F2 Known Points (2)
F3 Measurements (3)
function menu.
F4 Codes (4)
F1 F2 F3 F4

② A:
A: 【Code View/Del】1/2 ▼
Find: *
Press navigation key to Code: 1
search, the codes in the file will Desc: --- --- ---
be displayed one by one. Info1 : --- --- ---
Info2 : --- --- ---
Info3 : --- --- ---
B: NEW DELETE
B:
Press to move to searching
item. Input code name to be
searched (or wildcard “*”), and
press [ENT].

174

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


③ A:
A: 【 Code View/Del 】 1/2

The search results are shown on Find: PATH
the code item and are CODE: PATH
highligted by the cursor. If Desc N01
there are several codes with the Info1 : 2.36
Info1 : --- --- ---
same name, display them one
Info1 : --- --- ---
by one by pressing . NEW DELETE
B: B:
If wildcard “*” is input, it will 【Code View/Del】1/2 ▼
Find: *
start displaying from the first CODE 1
code in the file. By pressing Desc : --- --- ---
Info1 : --- --- ---
to display all codes in the
Info1 : --- --- ---
file one by one. Info1 : --- --- ---
C: NEW DELETE
If the input code doesn’t exist C:

in the file, the coding item


displays a blank. The cursor
stays on the Find item, and user
can continue inputting codes to
be searched.

【File Management】1/2 ▼

F1 Job (1)
④Press [ESC] to return to File F2 Known Points (2)
F3 Measurements (3)
Management menu.
F4 Codes (4)

F1 F2 F3 F4

6.4.3 Deleting Code


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

② A:
After entering code function 【Code View/Del】1/2 ▼
Find: *
dialog box, press directly the Code : 1
guide key to search. The
Desc: ﹉﹉﹉﹉
codes in document will be Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉
displayed one by one. ﹉
Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉
B: ﹉
NEW
Press guide key to move DELETE
cursor to Find item, input the B:
code name to be deleted, and
press ENT。

175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Code View/Del】1/2 ▼
Find: PATH
Code: 1
Desc: ﹉﹉﹉﹉
Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉﹉
AB
INSERT DELETE CLEAR
NUMBER
③ As the code to be deleted A:
occurs ,press[F4](DELETE)key。 【Code View/Del】 1/2 ▼
Find: *
A: CODE: FANCE
If the code to delete is found by
Desc : ﹉﹉﹉
guide key ,then after this Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉
code was deleted, the cursor ﹉
located displays the next coding Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

information. Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉
B: ﹉
NEW
If the code to delete found by
DELETE
inputting code name, then after B:
this code was deleted, at bright 【 Code View/Del 】 1/2
black place displays none(If there ▼
Find: PATH
are several codes with the same
CODE ﹉﹉﹉﹉
name, the next coding
Desc : ﹉﹉﹉
information will be displayed.)
Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

Info1 : ﹉﹉﹉

NEW
DELETE

6.5 INTIALIZING INTERNAL MEMORY


Deletes jobs, single data areas of a job or all data.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

176

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【File Management】1/2 ▼

F1 Job (1)
F2 Known Points (2)
F3 Measurements (3)
①In File Management menu,
F4 Codes (4)
press [PAGE] to display Page [PAGE]
F1 F2 F3 F4
2, and press [F1] to enter into [F1]
Initialize Memory function
dialog. 【File Management T 】2/2 ▲

F1 Initialize Memory (5)


F2 Memory Statistic (6)

②Press to select the job 【Initialization】


to be deleted, press [ENT] to
move to data item, through Job: 1
pressing to select the data DATA: MEAS VAL

types to be deleted in job. (Job,


measurement value, and known ALL DELETE
point are selectable.)
③Press [F4] ([DELETE]). The 【Initialization】
program indicates as the right
graph.
Delete data? Deleted data NoRevert!
To cancel deletion, press [F1]
to return to Initialize Memory
menu, user can select the job
DELET OK
and data to be deleted.
Press [F4] ([OK]), this data has
been deleted. The prgram
returns to initialize internal
memory menu, user can also go
on selecting job and data to be
deleted.
※1)[DELETE] Delete the data area selected.
[ALL] Delete all data in internal memory, all dadum in memory will be deleted
permanently!
After deleting, the data can not be recovered, therefore, before operation, be sure that the
useful data have been downloaded or stored.

6.6 MEMORY STATISTIC


Displays the information of memory, such as:
·The amount of the known points stored
·The amount of data block recorded(measurement points,codes, etc. )。

177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


·The amount of jobs which can be used or still not determined .
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【File Management】1/2 ▼

F1 Job (1)
F2 Known (2)
F3 Measurement (3)
F4 Code (4)
①In File Management menu,
F1 F2 F3 F4
press [PAGE] to display Page [PAGE]
2, press [F2] to enter into [F2]
Memory Statistic function 【File Management】2/2 ▲
dialog.
F1 Initialize Memory (5)
F2 Memory Statistic (6)

【Memory Information】
Job: 5
②Displays the information of
Station: 63
internal memory. Press to Known Pt: 201
Meas Rec: 428
display information of every
Use Job: 2
job one by one.
OK

【File Management】2/2 ▲
③Press [F4] ([OK]) or [ESC]
F1 Initialize Memory (5)
to return to the Page 2 of File F2 Memory Statistic (6)
Management.

7、 COMMUNICATION SETTING
To communicate data between computer and instrument, you must set communication
parameters.

178

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Comm Parameters】
Baudrate: 19200
Data bits: 7
Parity : None
End Mark: CR/LF
Stop Bit: 1

SET

BAUD RATE:
The optional baudrates are as follows: 1200, 2400,4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
115200 [BIT/SECOND].
DATA BITS:
7 Data will be transmitted by 7 bit. As seting Parity check,it is set as 7 bit automatically
8 Data will be transmitted by 8 bit. The parity is set as none automatically.
PARITY:
Even even check
Odd odd check
None None verify (If set data bit is 8 data bit)
END MARK:
CR/LF Carriage returns and line feeds
CR Carriage returns
STOP BIT: 1
To be fixed as1.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Menu】2/2 ▲
①In [MENU], press [PAGE] to
F1 Adjustments (5)
display Page 2, and press [F2] [PAGE] F2 Comm Parameters (6)
F3 Data Transfer (7)
to enter into the dialog of [F2]
F4 System Information (8)
setting communication
parameters.

② In the dialog of 【Comm Parameters】


communication parameters Baudrate : 19200

setting, by pressing to Data Bits : 7


select each item. And by Parity : None
pressing or per End Mark: CR/LF
time, the selection will change
Stop Bit: 1
accordingly.
SET
【Comm Parameters】
③After setting one paramerter, [ENT] Baudrate: 9600

press [ENT] to move to the + Data Bits: 7


next item. Set the other Parity : None
End Mark: CR/LF
parameters in the same method. + STOP BIT: 1
[ENT]
SET.

179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【MENU】2/2 ▲
④After setting all parameters,
F1 Adjustments (5)
press [F4] ([SET]) to store the F2 Comm Parameters (6)
F3 Data Transfer (7)
settings, and return to main
F4 System Information (8)
menu.

8、DATA TRANSFER
With this special function measured data can be transferd via the serial interface to receiver
(e.g. a PC). Using this tpye of transfer the success of the transfer is not checked.
Job:Selection of job from which data should be transferred.
Data:Select the data range to be transferred (measurements, fixed points)

180

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Format: Select ouput format. GSI is the fixed setting.
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【MENU】2/2 ▲
①In [MENU], press[PAGE] to
F1 Adjustments (1)
display Page 2, press [F3] to [F2] F2 Comm Parameters (2)
F3 Data Transfer (3)
enter into Data Transfer
F4 System Information (4)
function dialog.

【Send Data】
②Press to select job to
Job: All Jobs
be transferred. Selectable items Data: MeasVal
includes each job and all jobs Format: GSI
in internal memory.
SEND
③After setting the job, press 【Send Data】
[ENT] to move to format item. [ENT]
Job: SANDING
Similarly, press to select + Data: MeasVal
the data to be transferred. The Format: GSI
options are: measurement value SEND
and known point.
④ After finishing setting, 【Send Data】
ensure that instrument port and
receiver are connected with Sending………
communication cable. Press
[F4] ([SEND] key. BACK

9、 SYSTEM INFORMATION
Displays helpful information and data / time are set.

181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【System Information】
Battery: 80%
Date : 02.09.2006
Time : 10:14:48
Version: 07.04.24
Type : STS-700
Number: --- --- ---
DATE TIME FORMAT .
·Battery
Remaining battery power (e.g. 40%).
·Date
Displays the current date.
·Time
Displays current time
·Version
The software of instrument may have different versions which depends on those software
package composing the instrument software.
·Tpye
STS-750 (for instance)
·Number
Serial number of leaving factory for total station instrument
· Data
Set system date and format.

Soft Keys
[DATE]: Set date
·Format: Select modes of date displaying, three modes are available..
· yy.mm.dd
· dd.mm.yy
· mm.dd.yy
·Date: Input and display the date according to the selected date format.

[TIME]: Set time.


[FORMAT]: Format the system of the total station.

For both system and EDM setting are introduced in previous chapters, here they are not to
be repeated.

10. CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT


If the bubble of the circular vial is not in the center, bring the bubble to the center by using the

182

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


adjusting pin or hexagon wrench to adjust the bubble adjusting screw. First loosen the screw
opposite to the offset side, and then tighten the other adjusting screw on the offset side, bringing
the bubble to the center. After the bubble stays in the center, keep the tightness of the three screws
in uniform.

10.1 PLATE VIAL

Inspection
Refer to Section 3.2 “Leveling by using the plate vial”.

·Adjustment
1. If the bubble of the plate vial moves from the center, bring it half way back to the center by
adjusting the leveling screw, which is parallel to the plate vial. Correct the remaining half by
adjusting the screw of plate vial with adjusting pin.
2. Confirm whether the bubble does is in the center by rotating the instrument 180º. If not, repeat
Procedure ⑴.
3. Turn the instrument 90ºand adjust the third screw to center the bubble in the vial.
Repeat inspection and adjustment steps until the bubble remains in center with the vial in any
direction.

10.2 CIRCULAR VIAL


Inspection
No adjustment is necessary if the bubble of the circular vial is in the center after inspection and
adjustment of the plate vial.

Adjustment
If the bubble of the circular vial is not in the center, bring the bubble to the center by using the
adjusting pin or hexagon wrench to adjust the bubble adjusting screw. First loosen the screw
opposite to the offset side, and then tighten the other adjusting screw on the offset side, bringing
the bubble to the center. After the bubble stays in the center, keep the tightness of the three screws
in uniform.

10.3 INCLINATION OF RETICLE


Inspection
1. Sight object A through the telescope and lock the horizontal and vertical clamp screws.

183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. Move object A to the edge of the field of view with the vertical tangent screw (point A′)
3. Adjustment is not necessary if object A moves along the vertical line of the reticle and point A′
still in the vertical line.
As illustrated,A′offsets from the center to the cross hair tilts, then need to adjust the reticle.

Adjustment
1. If the object A does not move along with the vertical line, firstly remove the eyepiece cover to
expose the four reticle adjusting screws.
2. Loosen the four reticle adjusting screws uniformly with an adjusting pin. Rotate the reticle
around the sight line and align the vertical line of the reticle with pointA′.
3.Tighten the reticle adjusting screws uniformly,Repeat the inspection and adjustment to see if the
adjustment is correct.
4. Replace the eyepiece cover.

10.4 PERPENDICULARITY OF LINE OF SIGHT TO HORIZONTAL AXIS (2c)


Inspection
1. Set object A at a far distance at the same height as the instrument, then level and center the
instrument and turn on the power (horizontal angle L=10°13′10″).
2.Sight object A in left position and read the horizontal angle value (horizontal angle R=
190°13′40″).
3. Loosen the vertical and horizontal clamp screws and rotate the telescope. Sight object A in right
position and read the horizontal angle value.
4. 2C=L-R±180°=-30″≥±20″, adjustment is necessary.

Adjustment
A. Electronic Operation Procedures:

184

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【Menu】2/2 ▲
①After leveling the
F1 Adjustment (5)
instrument, press [MENU] to [MENU] F2 Comm Parameters (6)
F3 Data Transfer (7)
the menu display, press +
F4 System Information (8)
[PAGE] to access the Page 2. [F4]

【Adjustment】 ▼
②Press [F1] to enter into
F1 V-index (1)
adjustment. [F1] F2 Hz-collimation (2)
F3 Horizontal Axis (3)
F4 VO/Axis(Cons.list) (4)

【Hz-collimation】
③Select [F2] Hz-collimation, <Step 1> Front

the screen shows as follow : [F2]


HR : 332°26′21″
V : 92°59′42″

Please sight the target!


MEAS .
Sight the 【Hz-collimation】
④In left position rotate the target in <Step 2> Reverse

telescope. Precisely sight any normal


HR: 152°25′58″
target A in the same height position V : 267°00′20″
with the instrument until the +
Please sight the target!
vertical angle display. Press [F1] MEAS .
[F1] ([Meas]).
⑤ Rotate the telescope, and Sight the 【Hz-collimation】
sight the same target A target in
precisely in the right position. reverse
Press [F1] ([Meas]) key. position Hz-collimation: 0°00′11″

Setting is finished and the +


screen shows as follow. [F1]
BACK SET

⑥Press [F4]([set]) to finish 【Adjustment】 ▼


V-Index Adjustment. The
F1 V-index (1)
screen returns to the F2 Hz-collimation (2)
F3 Horizontal Axis (3)
ADJUSTMENT mode [F4]
F4 VO/Axis(Cons.list) (4)
[SET] : Replace the old
adjustment value to new one.
[ESC]:Exit program but not
save new adjustment value

185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


B、Optics Adjustment (professional maintenance man use)
1. Use the tangent screw to adjust the horizontal angle reading,
2. Take off the cover of the reticle between the eyepiece and focusing screw. Adjust the two
adjusting screws by loosening one and tightening the other. Move the reticle to sight object A
exactly.
3. Repeat inspection and adjustment until|2C|<20".
4. Replace the cover of the reticle
Note: After adjustment, need to check the photoelectricity coaxiality.

10.5 VERTICAL INDEX DIFFERENCE COMPENSATION

Inspection
1. Mount and level the instrument and make the telescope parallel with the line connecting the
center of the instrument to any one of the screws. Lock the horizontal clamp screw.
2. After turning on the power, zero the vertical index. Lock the vertical clamp screw and the
instrument should display the vertical angle value.
3. Rotate the vertical clamp screw slowly in either direction about 10mm in circumference, and
the error message “b” will appear. The vertical axis has increased to more than 3ˊat this time and
exceed the designated compensation range.
4. Rotate the above screw to its original position, and the instrument display screen will show the
vertical angle again, meaning that the vertical index difference compensation function is working.
Adjustment
If the compensation function is not working, send the instrument back to the factory for repair.

10.6 ADJUSTMENT OF VERTICAL INDEX DIFFERENTCE (I angle) AND


VERTICAL ANGLE 0 DATUM
Inspect the item after finishing after finishing the inspection and adjustment of Item 10.3 and
10.5.
Inspection
1. Power on after leveling the instrument. Sight object A in left position and read the
Vertical angle value L.
2. Rotate the telescope. Sight object B in right position and read the Vertical angle value R.
3. If the vertical angle is 0°in zenith,i= (L+R-360°)/2
If the vertical angle is0°in horizon. i= (L+R-180°)/2or (L+R-540°)/2.
4. If |i| ≥10″ shall set the Vertical Angle 0 Datum again.

·Adjustment:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Menu】2/2 ▲

F1 Adjustment (5)
①Press [F4] to second page [F4] F2 Comm Parameters (6)
F3 Data Transfer (7)
on the Menu page layout.
F4 System Information (8)

【Adjustment】 ▼

F1 V-index (1)
②Select [F1] to Adjustment [F1] F2 Hz-collimation (2)
F3 Horizontal Axis (3)
function
F4 VO/Axis(Cons.list) (4)

【V-Index】
③Press [F1] to V-Index <Step 1> Front
Adjustment. The screen views [F1]
HR: 219°17′58″
as follow: V : 94°05′12″

Sight the target!


MEAS .
④In left position rotate the Sight the 【V-Index】
telescope. Precisely sight the target in <Step 2> Reverse

any target A in same height normal


HR: 39°11′05″
with the instrument until the position V : 265°54′15″
vertical angle display. Press +
Sight the target!
[F1] ([MeaS]). [F1] MEAS .

【V-Index】
⑤Rotate the telescope, and Sight the
sight the same target A prism in Index Difference: 3°58′11″
VT Error: 0°00′31″
precisely in the right position. reverse
Press [F1] ([Meas]. Setting is position
finished and the screen shows + BACK SET
as follow. [F1]
⑥Press [F4] ([set]) to finish 【Adjustment】 ▼
V-Index Adjustment. The
F1 V-index (1)
screen returns to the [F4] F2 Hz-collimation (2)
F3 Horizontal Axis (3)
ADJUSTMENT mode
F4 VO/Axis(Cons.list) (4)
[SET] : Replace the old
adjustment value to new one.
[ESC]:Exit program but not
save new adjustment value

Note: 1. Repeat the inspection setps to measure the Index Difference (I angle). If the Index
Difference cannot meet the requirement; you should check that if the three steps of the
adjustment and the sight are right. Then set again according to the requirement.

187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2. If Index Difference still not meet the requirement after the repeated operation, the
instrument should be returned to factory for inspection and repair.

10.7 TRANSVERSE AXIS ERROR ADJUSTMENT


As the transverse axis error only effect the angle of sight, it can but be confirmed through
observing the target whose height is under or higher instrument obviously.
If you want to avoid the influence ,you must adjust them before Adjustment.
There is no need to sight the prism of target plane by ensuring the transvers axis error, so you
can do it any time. Select an available point which is far away the instrument, higher or under
the instrument greatly, and ensure can precisely sight the point twice.
·STEP:
OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY
【 Adjustment】 ▼

F1 V-index (1)
①Press [F3] to Horizontal [F3] F2 HZ-collimation (2)
F3 Horizontal Axis (3)
Axis in Adjustment function
F4 VO/Axis(Cons.List) (4)

②The screen views as Sight the 【Horizontal Axis】 [0/10]


follow: In left position target in <Step 1> Front

rotate the telescope. normal


HR: 335°28′41″
Precisely sight the any position V : 107°16′20″
target(obliquity is±10° ~ +[F1]
Please sight the target!
±45°), press [F1] ([Meas]) 10 times MEAS INPUT
key 10 times.
③Rotate the telescope, and Sight the 【Horizontal Axis】 [0/10]
sight the same target prism in <Step 2> Reverse
precisely in the right reverse
HR: 155°27′01″
position. Press [F1] position V : 252°43′47″
([Meas]) 10 times. +[F1]
Please sight the target!
10 times MEAS INPUT
【Transverse Axis Error Adjustment】

④Finish setting, the screen


shows as follow. Transverse Axis Error: 0°00′36″

BACK SET

⑤Press [F4] ([set]) to finish 【 Adjustment】 ▼


Index Difference
F1 V-index (1)
Adjustment. The screen [F4] F2 HZ-collimation (2)
F3 Horizontal Axis (3)
returns to the
F4 VO/Axis(Cons.List) (4)
ADJUSTMENT mode
[SET] : Replace the old

188

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


adjustment value to new
one.
[ESC]:Exit program but not
save new adjustment value

10.8 OPTICAL PLUMMET


Inspection
1. Set the instrument on the tripod and place a piece of white paper with two perpendicular lines,
then intersect drawn on it directly under the instrument.
2. Adjust the focus of the optical plummet and move the paper so that the intersection point of the
lines on the paper comes to the center of the field of view.
3. Adjust the leveling screws so that the center mark of the optical plummet coincides with the
intersection point of the cross on the paper.
4. Rotate the instrument around the vertical axis,and observe to know if the center mark position
coincides with the intersection point of the cross at every 90°.
5. If the center mark always coincides with intersection point, no adjustment is necessary.
Otherwise, the following adjustment is necessary.

Adjustment
1.Take off the protective cover between the optical plummet eyepiece and focusing knob.
2. Fix the paper. Rotate the instrument and mark the point of the center of optical plummet which
falls on the paper at every 90°. As illustrated: Point A, B, C, and D.
3. Draw lines that attach AC and BD and mark the intersection point of the two lines as O.
4. Adjust the four adjusting screws of the optical plummet with an adjusting pin until the center
mark coincides with Point O.
5. Repeat the inspection and adjusting steps to be sure that the adjustment is correct.
6. Replace the protective cover.

10.9 INSTRUMENT CONSTANT (K)


Instrument constant has been checked up and adjusted in the factor, K=0. It changes seldom and it

189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


is suggested to check one or two times every year. The inspection should be made on the base line,
also can be made according to the following method.

Inspection
1. Mount and level the instrument on Point A at a plain place. Use the vertical hair to mark Point B
and Point C with the distance of 50m on the same line, and set the reflector accurately.
2. After setting temperature and air pressure in the instrument, measure the Horizontal Distance of
AB and AC accurately.
3. Set the instrument on Point B and center it accurately, measure the Horizontal Distance of BC
accurately.
4. Then you can get the Instrument Constant :K=AC-(AB+BC)
K should be closed to 0,If |K|>5mm, the instrument should be strictly inspected in the
standard baseline site, and adjusted according the inspection value.

Adjustment
If strict inspection approves that the Instrument Constant K has changed and is not closed to 0. If
the operator wants to adjust, should set Stadia Constant according to the Constant K

●Set the direction by using the Vertical Hiar to make Point A, B, C on the same line strictly.
There must be fixed and clear centering mark.on the point B.
●Whether the prism center of Point B coincides with the Instrument Center, it is the important step
to inspect the accuracy. So on Point B the tripod or tribrach compatible should be used. That will
decrease the difference.

·Input Instrument Constant:

OPERATIONAL STEPS OPERATION DISPLAY

190

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【Adjustment】 ▲

F1 Inst. Constant (5)


①Press[Turn page] key to the [F4] F2 Tilt Parameter (6)
F3 State (7)
second page of the
Adjustment function.※1)

【Inst. Constant Set】


②Select [F1] into Instrument
Constant Setting interface. [F1] Inst Cons: 0.0 mm
Input instruction constant.

SAVE

Input 【Adjustment】 ▲
③Press [F4] to conserve the Instrument
F1 Inst. Constant (5)
setting and return to Constant F2 Tilt Parameter (6)
F3 State (7)
Adjustment screen. +
[F4]

※1)F2:Auto compensation parameter is used for factory setting. Please do not modify it.

10.10 PARALLEL BETWEEN LINE OF SIGHT AND EMITTING


PHOTOELETRIC AXIS

·Inspection
1. Set the reflector 50m from the
instrument.
2. Sight the center of the
reflector prism with reticle.
3. Turn on and enter Distance
Measurement Mode. Press [MEAS] to measure.
Rotate the Horizontal Tangent Screw and Vertical Tangent Screw, to do electric collimation and
make the light route of EDM unblocked. In the bight zone find the center of emitting
photoelectric axis.
4. Check the center of reticle to coincide with the center of emitting photoelectric axis. If so, the
instrument is up to grade.

191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


10.11 TRIBRACH LEVELLING SCREW
If the leveling screw becomes flexible, adjusts the two adjusting screw in the leveling screw to
tighten the screw appropriately.

10.12 RELATED PARTS FOR REFLECTOR

1. The Tribrach and Adapter for Reflector


The plate vial and optical plummet in the adapter and tribrach should be checked, referring to
Chapter 10.1 and 10.8.
2. Perpendicularity of the prism pole
As illustrated in Chapter 10.8, mark ‘+’ on Point C, place the tine of the prism pole on the
Point C and do not move during the inspection. Place the two feet tine of Bipod on the cross lines
of Point E and F. Adjust the two legs to make the bubble on the prism pole centered.
Set and level the instrument on Point A near the cross. Sight the tine of Point C with the center
of reticle, and fix the Horizontal Clamp Screw. Rotate the telescope upward to making D near the
horizontal hair. Flex the prism pole Leg e to make the D in the center of reticle. Then both Point C
and D are on the central line of reticle.
Set the instrument on Point B to another cross lines. With the same way flexing the Leg f to
make Point C and D are on the central line of reticle.
Through the adjustment of the instrument on Point A and B, Prism pole has been perpendicular.
If then the bubble offset from the center, adjust the three screws under circularial to make the
bubble centered.
Check and adjust again until the bubble is in the center of the vial from both directions of the
prism pole.

192

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


11.SPECIFICATION
STS-752/722 STS-755/725 STS-758/728
(just for export)
Distance Measurement
Measuring Single 2.4 Km 2.0 Km 2.0 Km
Range(under prism
fair weather Triple 3.0 Km 2.6 Km 2.6 Km
condition) prism
Display Max:999999.999 m Min : 1 m
Accuracy 2+2 ppm
Unit m/ft selectable
Measuring time Fine single shot: 3S
Tracking: 1S
Average measuring times The average value of 2~5 times
Meteorologic Correction Manual input, Auto correction
Atmospheric refraction and Manual input, Auto correction
earth curvature correction
Reflection prism correction Manual input, Auto correction
Angle Measurement
Measuring method Absolute encoding
Diameter of raster disk 79mm
Minimum reading 1″/ 5″/10″Selectable
Accuracy 2″ 5″ 10″
Detection method Horizontal: Dual Horizontal:Dual
Vertical :Dual Vertical :Single
Telescope
Image Erect
Telescope Length 154 mm
Effective aperture 45 mm (EDM 50 mm)
Magnification 30×
Field of view 1°30′
Minimum focus 1m
Resolving power 3″
Vertical Compensator
System Liquid-electric detection/plate vial
Compensation range ±3′
Resolving power 1″
Vial
Plate vial 30″/2 mm
Circular vial 10′/2 mm
Optical Plummet
Image Erect

193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Magnification 3×
Focusing range 0.5m~∝
Field of view 5°
Display
Type 750:Double LCD,Figure key+Letter key
720:Double LCD
On-board Battery
Power resource Rechargeable Ni-H battery
Voltage DC 6V
Continuous operation time 8hours
Size & weight
Dimension 200×190×350mm
Weight 6.0 ㎏

194

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


12、ACCESSORIES

Carrying Case 1pc

Main Body 1pc

On-board Battery 1pc

Backup Battery 1pc

Charger 1pc

Plummet 1pc

Correction Pin 2 pcs

Fur Brush 1pc

Screwdriver 1pc

Hexagon Wrench 2 pcs

Cloth 1pc

Dryer 1pc

Operation Manual 1pc

195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


【APPENDIX-A】DATA COMMUNICATION
You can transfer, edit, and manage the data expediently through the data communication software
of SANDING Company.
Data communication software main menu:

1、SET COMMUNICATION PARAMETER


Before data transfer, please make sure peripheral equipment (for example PC) and Total
Station have been connected already. Open “Data Change Manager”, click “Option”, then “Port
Setting”, the screen views below:

1) Select the peripheral equipment port in Current Choice, which connected with Total Station,
and the model of the Total Station.
2) Set the communication parameter in Setting display: Baud Rate, Data Bit, Parity, Branch
symbol(分行符) , and Stop Bit. The communication parameter must be consistent with the
Communication Setting of Total Station.

196

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3) Press OK to preserve setting and exit.
Default communication setting that Total Station STS-700 series connect with peripheral
equipment as follow:
Model Baud Rate Data Bit Parity Branch Stop Bit
symbol
STS700 19200 8 NO CRLF 1

2、DATA TRANSFER
Data transport allow user to download and upload data between Total Station and peripheral
equipment (such as PC). The data that can be transferred contains measurement data, coordinate
data, coding data and road alignment data.
Open data transmission implement , showed as the below graph , including two windows of
left and right:

The left window displayed the COM socket connected with Total Station Instrument and
document files,document information.The right window displayed document files and document
informations of each drivers in PC.Users at the same time,can set data type needed to display
through“document filtration”sellection item .
Through data transmission implement it can transmit data conveniently and breezily up to
Total Station Instruments or down to PC.

PASS DOWN DATA :


1)On the right window the data specified are transmited to routes in PC,that is to select drivers
and document files.showed as below picture. :

197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


2)On left window,select job names and data type (the known point、measurement data、code or
path fixing line data),click right key of mouse,choose “COPY”。

3)Inside dialog box springed out select data type needed to store,,there are three modes can be
selected :GST、IDEX and SOUTH CASS(*DAT).

198

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


4)Press “OK”to start data transmission

5)Transmission ending ,dialog box quit automatically.

Data formats transmited from Total Station Instrument


Here, taking partial measurement datum as an example:
*110001+0000000000000001 21.034+0000000014301010 22.034+0000000009054140
31..00+0000000000002004 81..00+0000000000001205 82..00-0000000000001601
83..00-0000000000004032 87..10+0000000000005000
*110002+0000000000000002 21.034+0000000017510540 22.034+0000000008523530
31..00+0000000000014397 81..00+0000000000001205 82..00-0000000000014300
83..00-0000000000002845 87..10+0000000000005000
GSI-ID
11 POINT NAME

199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


21 HORIZONTAL DIRECTION
22 VERTICAL ANGLE
31 TILTED DISTANCE
32 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE
33 HEIGHT WARP
41-49 CODING AND ATTRIBUTES
51 PPM(mm)
58 PRISM CONSTANT
81-83 (X、Y、H) TARGET POINT
84-86 (X、Y、H)MEASUREMENT STATION POINT
87 PRISM HEIGHT
88 INSTRUMENT HEIGHT

B: PASS UP DATA
1)On the right window,select data documents which has been edited and will be transmted to
Total Station Instrument ,click the right key of mouse ,select“COPY” showed as the below
picture :

2)Select busywork name in memory of Total Station Instrument which the data should be passed
up,showed as the below picture:

200

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3)If the busywork selected is empty,you need to input document name.showed as the below
picture. :

4)Start pasing up information

201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5)As have finished inputting,the dialog box quit automatically.

3、 COORDINATE EDITING
Through coordinate editor,can edit and store coordinate datum.each row of coordinate data
including of point number、Y(E coordinate)、X(N coordinate)、H(height )。The code here,may not
use,and to edit in code block manage implement
A、 NEW –ESTABLISH COORDINATE DOCUMENT
1)Open “COORDINATE EDITOR”,procedure set automatically a new coordinate document.

2)Inside dialog box input coordinate information.including point number、Y(E coordinate )、X(N
coordinate)、H(height )。Showed as the below picture :

202

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3)Click“DOCUMENT ”→“STORE”,a document storing dialog box is springed out choose
store type of data ,after haveinputted document name,click “STORE”。

B:OPEN DOCUMENT
1)Inside“DOCUMENT”menu select“OPEN”,in the dialog box springed out select coordinate
data needed to open .showed as the right picture. :

2)Inside “DOCUMENT TYPE”column,set document type needed to open (GSI、IDX、


SOUTHCASS documents of three types are provided),select the document need to open,and click
“OPEN”。
C:SET PRECISION OF DISTANCE UNIT
User can set precision of distance unit of coordinat data according to requirement.The operational
step as follows:
1) Inside “OPTION”menu presss“SETUP”。
2) On the dialog box springed out,select precision of distance unit

203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The precision of each distance unit provided by e SANDINGtransmision software as follows
PRECISION
DISTANCE
UNIT
0.001
METER 0.0001
0.00001

4、 CODING BLOCK EDIT


User can set new and edit the editing block through coding management implement .each coding
block contains two parts of coding and attrebutes, the coding block edited well can be transmited
to Total Station Instrument through data transmision implement .

NEW-ESTABLISHMENT CODING BLOCK


1) Inside “DOCUMENT”menu select “NEW -SET”,set a new coding block document .

2)Program springed out “new coding block”dialog box , input coding block name on“coding
block name”location and in “writer”item can input nothing.

204

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3)Click“CONFIRM ”key,set a new coding block document.

After coding block is set ,the later job is to edit codes in coding block. Each coding block is
consisted of the code and 8 attributes .

4) Set a new code


Input coding name,and define shortcut key for this code。The shortcut key is consisted of two
arabic numerals.

205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


5)On the left window of coding subdirectories,click the code,to enter editing function of code
attributes。Input each attribute.

6)After have edited i t,store document.

5、 DESIGN ROAD FIXING LINE DATA


Open “road fixing line editor”program set automatically a new document.showed as below
graph.:

206

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Later on ,carry on edit fixing line data of road in the document established .as finish
editing.,store data then quit program.

A: HORIZONTAL FIXING LINE FORMAT


The horizontal fixing line is transmited from computer to instrument through fixing line
element ,including elementary define,it should include in elementry define incept stake number
and coordinate of this point. the fixing line elements have point,beeline,arc,and curve relaxed .
Each record format are :
(KEYWORD) nnn,nnn[,nnn]

In here:
(INCEPT POINT) stake number ,E,N
(BEELINE) azimuth, distance
(ARC) radius arc length
(SPIRAL LINE) radius length
(POINT) E,N[,A1,A2]
(A1,A2:LENGTH)

For example1:
START 1000.000,1050.000,1100.000
STRAIGHT 25.0000,48.420
SPIRAL 20.000,20.000
ARC 20.000,23.141
SPIRAL 20.000,20.000
STRAIGHT 148.300,54.679

Exaple 2:
START 1000.000,1050.000,1100.000
PT 1750.000,1300.000,100.000,80.800

207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


PT 1400.000,1750.000,200.000
PT 1800.000,2000.000

B: Vertical curve format


Input vertical curve data to computer through typical point and stake number,the vertical curve
data should be included the height ,curve length,and the curve length of incept point and terminal
point are zero.
Data format are :
Stake number , height , length

For example:
1000.000,50.000,0.000
1300.000,70.000,300.000
1800.000,70.000,300.000
2300.000,90.000,0.000

【APPENDIX B】 CALCULATE ROAD ALIGNMENT


The road alignment set out program can set out the alignment including straight, arc and spiral
transition

NOTE :
1) Road alignment data can be uploaded from COMPUTER or can be entered manually.
2) Both road alignment and cross section data are managed by chainage.

1. ROAD Alignment Elements

There are two ways to enter the alignment elements:


1) Download from PC.
2) Manually entered on the STS-700 series.

How to enter the alignment data is explained below:

An Element of Alignment Parameter


Straight Bearing, Distance
Transition Curve Radius, Length of Transition
Arc Radius, Length of Arc
PT N,E,radius,A1,A2

208

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


NOTE: When downloading from COMPUTER or by entering PT option, you do not have to
calculate the Parameter.

Pt North East Radius Transition curve A1 Transition curve A2


(N) (E) (R)
BP 1100.000 1050.000
IP1 1300.000 1750.000 100.000 80.000 80.000
IP2 1750.000 1400.000 200.000 0.000 0.000
EP 2000.000 1800.000

Example :
To enter the following data select DEF AL of ROADS from PROG menu :

Chainage 0
N 1100.000
E 1050.000
Press [ENT] key and then press [F4](PT) key ,Enter the following data :

N 1300.000
E 1750.000
R 100.000
A1 80.000
A2 80.000

Enter the following data in the above way :


N 1750.000
E 1400.000
R 200.000
A1 0.000
A2 0.000

N 2000.000
E 1800.000
R 0.000

209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


A1 0.000
A2 0.000

The following data is downloaded in the above example :


START 0.000,1050.000,1100.000 CRLF
PT 1750.000,1300.000,100.000,80.000,80.000 CRLF
PT 1400.000,1750.000,200.000,0.000,0.000 CRLF
PT 1800.000,1800.000,2000.000 CRLF

2、Calculation of clothoid length

⑴ Calculation of clothoid length


2
A1.2
L1.2 = L1.2 : Length of clothoid
R
A1.2 : Parameter of clothoid
R :Radius

2 2 2 2
A1 80 A2 80
L1 = R = 100 =64 m L2 = R = 100 =64 m

⑵ Calculation of Spiral Angle


2

τ= L2
2A

2
180
τ = 264
1

= 0.32 rad
2
⇒ deg ⇒ 0.32
π
=18°20′06″
80
∴ τ = -τ
1 2

⑶ Calculation of transition coordinates

N = A ⋅ 2τ (1 − τ + τ − τ ....)
2 4 6

10 216 9360

E = A ⋅ 2τ ( − τ + τ − τ ....)
τ 3 5 7

3 42 1320 7560

2 4 6
(0.32) (0.32) (0.32)
N = 80 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 0.32 (1 − + − ....)
10 216 9360
0.01024 0.01048576 0.00107341824
= 64(1 − + − )
10 216 9360
= 64(1 − 0.01024 + 0.00004855 − 0.00000011)
= 64 * 0.98981
= 63.348
as well as E :

210

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


3 5 7
0.32 (0.32) (0.32) (0.32)
E = 80 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 0.32 ( − + − ....)
3 42 1320 7560
= 64(0.10666667 − 0.00078019 + 0.0000025 − 0)
= 6.777
This example is symmetry spiral transition N1=N2,E1=E2

⑷ Calculation of shift value ∆R


∆R = E − R (1 − cosτ )
∆R = 6.777 − 100(1 − cos18 °20′06″)
= 1.700
Symmetry spiral transition ∆ R1 = ∆ R2

⑸ Calculation of Spiral Transition coordinate


N m = N − R sin τ =63.348-100sin18°20′06″=31.891
Symmetry spiral transition N m1 = N m 2

⑹ Calculation of Tangent Distance


LA
D1 = R tan( 2 ) + ∆ R 2 cos ec( LA) − ∆ R1 cot( LA) + N m1
1 1
LA = + 111°55′47″, cos ec = , cot =
sin tan

D1 = 100 * tan(111°55′47″/ 2) +1.7(1 / sin111°55′47″)


–1.7(1 / tan 111°55′47″) +31.891
=148.06015 + 1.8326 + 0.6844 +31.891
=182.468
D1 = D2

⑺ Calculation of the coordinate KA1


N KA1 = N IP1 − D1 ⋅ cosα 1
E KA1 = E IP1 − D1 ⋅ sin α 1

Bearing from BP to IP1 ⇒ α = 74°03′16.6″


1

N KA1 = 1300 –182.468 * cos 74°03′16.6″=1249.872 m

E KA1 = 1750 –182.468 * sin 74°03′16.6″=1574.553 m

⑻ Calculation of Arc Length


L = R ( LA − τ 1 + τ 2)
=R(111°55′47″-2 * 18°20′06″)
π
=100( 75°15′35″ o
)
180
=131.353 m

211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


⑼ Calculation of the coordinate KA2
N KA 2 = N IP1 − D2 ⋅ cosα 2
E KA2 = E IP1 − D2 ⋅ sinα 2

Bearing from IP1 to IP2 ⇒ α 2 = 322°07′30.1″


N KA2 = 1300 –(-182.468) * cos 322°07′30.1″= 1444.032 m
E KA2 = 1750 –(-182.468) * sin 322°07′30.1″= 1637.976 m

⑽ Calculation of coordinates BC,EC which is ARC (IP1,IP2,EP)


Arc length CL = R ⋅ IA
IA= 95°52′11″

π
CL=200 * 95°52′11″* o
=334.648 m
180

IA
TL = R ⋅ tan( ) = 200 * tan(95°52′11″/ 2) =221.615 m
2

Each coordinates are computed :


N BC = N IP 2 − TL ⋅ cosα 2
E BC = E IP 2 − TL ⋅ sinα 2
N EC = N IP 2 − TL ⋅ cosα 3
E EC = E IP 2 − TL ⋅ sin α 3
:
α (Bearing from IP1 to IP2) = 322°07′30.1″
2

α (Bearing from IP2 to EP) = 57°59′40.6″


3

N BC = 1750 - 221.615 * cos322°07′30.1″ =1575.068 m


E BC = 1400 - 221.615 * sin322°07′30.1″ =1536.058 m
N EC = 1750 –(-221.615) * cos57°59′40.6″=1867.456 m
E EC = 1400 –(-221.615) * sin57°59′40.6″=1587.929 m

The results are calculated as below :

212

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


The coordinates and the distance are calculated as below :

1) Compute the length of straight line


Straight line

BP·KA1= (1249.872 −1100.000) + (1574.553−1050) = 545.543 m


2 2

straight line KA2·BC = (1575.068 −1444.032) + (1536.058 −1637.976) = 166.005 m


2 2

straight line

EC·EP = (2000 −1867.456) + (1800 −1587.929) = 250.084 m


2 2

Start point coordinate (BP)


N 1100.000 m
E 1050.000 m
straight line ( between BP and KA1 )
Bearing 74°03′16.6″
Distance 545.543 m
Transition clothoid (between KA1 and KE1)
Radius -100 m (“-”sign is turn left curve toward the end point )
Length 64 m
ARC (between KE1 and KE2)
Radius -100 m (“-” sign is turn left curve toward the end point)
Length 131.354 m
Transition (Between KE2 and KA2)
Radius -100 m (“-” sign is turn left curve toward the end point)
Length 64 m

213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Straight line (between KA2 and BC)
Bearing 322°07′30.1″
Distance 166.004 m
Arc (between BC and EC)
Radius 200 (without sign is turn right curve toward the end point)
Length 334.648 m
Straight line (between EC and EP)
Bearing 57°59′40.6″
Distance 250.084 m

214

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like